You are on page 1of 615

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2003
PLM160 Recipe Management
THE BEST-RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP
SAP AG 2005
PLM160
Recipe Management



SAP R/3 Enterprise
2005/Q2
Material number 50077581


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2003
Copyright 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Neither this publication nor any part of it may be copied or
reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior
written consent of SAP AG. The information contained in this
publication is subject to change without prior notice.
Copyright


Trademarks
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of
other software vendors.
Microsoft, Windows, Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400,
iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corp. in the USA and/or other countries.
ORACLE is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.
UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
HTML, XML, XHTML, and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C, World Wide Web
Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
JAVA is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and
implemented by Netscape.
MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden.
SAP, R/3, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their
respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in other countries
worldwide. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective owners. Data
contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.
The information contained in this publication is subject to change without prior notice. These materials are
provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without
representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to
the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Required:
Overview course on Product LifeCycle Management / Life-
Cycle Data Management (PLM100)
Recommended:
Experience with Produce LifeCycle Management and Life-
Cycle Data Management functions
Experience with Environment, Health & Safety
(EH&S) basic data and tools
Course Prerequisites



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Target Group
Target audience
Project teams implementing Recipe Management as part of
their new product development process
Consultants interested in understanding how Recipe
Management can assist companies in their product definition
process
Duration: Five days



These training materials are not teach-yourself programs. They complement the course instructor's
explanations. There is additional space throughout the course for you to write down additional notes and
information.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Course Goals
Course Objectives
Course Content
Course Overview Diagram
Main Business Scenario
Contents:
Course Overview



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Course Goals
This course will prepare you to:
Perform new product development processes
using Recipe Management tools
Create and edit specifications, phrases, and
recipes
Use versions and Engineering Change
Management to manage recipes



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Course Objectives
At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to:
Understand the role of Recipe Management within the PLM and
NPDI solutions
Utilize EH&S basis data and tools to enable Recipe Management
Perform new product development using Recipe Management
Create and edit recipes using basic and advanced functions
Manage recipe change history using ECM and versioning
Use recipes to model nutritional data and diet suitability
Create profiles for energy and storage/process losses
Explain recipe transformation and SCM integration
Preview Trial Management functionalitym focusing on the
transition from laboratory product development to full production



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Course Content PLM 160
Unit 10 RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
Unit 11 Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Unit 12 Diet Suitability
Unit 13 Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Unit 14 Key Figures
Unit 15 Recipe Engineering
Change Management
Unit 16 Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Unit 17 SCM Integration
Unit 18 Trial Management and
RM Outlook
Unit 1 Course Introduction
Unit 2 Specification Database:
Basics
Unit 3 Phrase Management
Unit 4 Specification Database:
Advanced
Unit 5 WWI Reporting and EH&S
Tools
Unit 6 Recipe Management
Workbench
Unit 7 Recipe Header Information
Unit 8 Recipe Process and
Process Elements
Unit 9 RM Formula Basics
Preface



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13




I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe
Management
Introduction



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-2
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management as part of New Product Development
and Introduction (NPDI)
Where Recipe Management fits in the PLM roadmap
How Recipe Management is relevant to process industries
PLM Recipe Management and SCM integration
History and basis of SAP Recipe Management
Contents:
Introduction



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-3
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Introduction: Unit Objectives
Describe the SAP Product LifeCycle Management
(SAP PLM) modules and explain where Recipe
Management fits in the PLM roadmap
Explain how Recipe Management is relevant to
process industries
Describe Recipe Management as part of New
Product Development and Introduction (NPDI)
Describe the history and basis of SAP Recipe
Management



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Course Introduction Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-6
SAP AG 2006
Your company is in a process industry including
consumer products (food and non-food), chemicals,
and pharmaceuticals and is interested in improving
its new product development and commercialization
process.
Introduction: Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-7
SAP AG 2006
The Key is Effective, Collaborative NPDI Processes
Marketing R&D Supply Chain Manufacturing Marketing
Designs Bills of
material
Customer
needs
Launch
plans
Opportunity Product
External
Partners
New Product Development and Introduction (NPDI) is the process of
managing all activities and resources to bring a new product to market
that meets customer needs and supports the business goals.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-8
SAP AG 2006
Project, Resource, and
Cost Management
2. Balance portfolio
Prioritize investments
Balance resources
3. Create project plan
Schedule tasks
Allocate resources
Define quality gates
and deliverables
4. Design product
Meet customer needs
Meet business goals
1. Determine need for
new products
Track opportunities
Prioritize concepts
8. Manage project
Manage stage reviews
Monitor schedule and
budget
SAP Supports an Integrated, Closed-Loop NPDI Process
5. Establish sourcing and
supply chain
Select optimum suppliers
Create optimum supply chain
6. Establish Production
Set up manufacturing process
Resolve design problems
7. Launch Product
Create demand
Prepare channel
Finding, Investing in, and Launching
the Right New Products
Idea,
Portfolio
Management
Product
Development
Market
Launch
Supply
Chain
Planning
Product
Ramp-
Up
Strategic
Sourcing
Prototyping



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-9
SAP AG 2006
xApp Product Definition (xPD)
xApp Resource and Portfolio
Management (xRPM)
cProjects (mySAP
PLM or ERP)
mySAP PLM
Recipe Mgmt
Spec Mgmt
SAP Products Supporting NPDI
mySAP SRM
mySAP SCM
mySAP ERP
mySAP CRM
Project, Resource, and
Cost Management
Idea,
Portfolio
Management
Product
Development
Market
Launch Supply
Chain
Planning
Product
Ramp-
Up
Strategic
Sourcing
Prototyping



SAP provides an integrated solution to enable the New Product Development and Introduction (NPDI)
business process.
This comprehensive solution develops and manages new products from initial concept through to
obsolescence.
Recipe Management drives the formulation, analysis, and eventual commercialization of new products
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-10
SAP AG 2006
What is Product Lifecycle Management ?
Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) is a solution that
facilitates creativity. It takes the idea of product innovation
beyond the boundaries of traditional organizational
constraints.
From first product conception, development, design, and
engineering onwards to production ramp-up, license to
operate, product change management and well into the area
of quality management, service, and maintenance PLM
provides a holistic view of all product-related business
processes.
PLM provides all needed information over the complete
product and asset life cycle, through the extended supply
chain, thereby ensuring legal compliance.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-11
SAP AG 2006
PLM Application Map 2005
Life-Cycle Data
Management
Document Management
Product Master &
Structure Management
Specification and
Recipe Management
Service & Maintenance
Structure Management
Change and
Configuration
Management
Life-Cycle Process
Support
Product and Project
Portfolio
Management
SAP NetWeaver
Idea Management and
Concept Development
Project Planning
Time and Resource
Management
Project Execution
Strategic Portfolio
Management
Corporate Services
People Integration Information Integration Process Integration Application Platform
Audit Management
Hazardous Tracking /
Product Stewardship
Dangerous Goods /
Waste Management
Workers Health and Safety
Product
Development
Development
Collaboration and
Strategic Sourcing
Prototyping and
Production Ramp-
Up
Hand-Over to Sales,
Service &
Maintenance
Quality Engineering
and Improvement
Product Costing



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-12
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management
Manages all product data from concept thru launch and beyond
Product Developers Workbench
Integrated maintenance of recipes, formulas, specifications,
structured process definition with equipment requirements,
and in-process control (QM)
Change and version management
Recipe trials manage ramp-up to production volume
Complete Management of All Specification Data
Flexible and adaptable database shared with EH&S
Centralized management of all types of specifications
Manage all technical properties and characteristics
Sophisticated Formulation Capabilities
Nutrition and total solid calculations
Losses, gains, and cost management
Formula standardization, optimization, and comparison
mySAP PLM Recipe Management



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-13
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management Focus
Recipe Management is Designed to:
Support new recipe-based product development processes
Start with high-level requirements and extend to detailed material and process
specifications
Manage controlled development of recipes over different enterprise levels
Support integrated communication between different departments
Target Customers
Process industry including consumer products (food and non-food), chemicals,
and pharmaceuticals
Target Users
Product developers creating new products and maintaining existing products
Users at local/production sites (provide executable recipes based on centrally-
managed products)



The target audience is research and development, usually at a central, corporate location.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-14
SAP AG 2006
Product Definition: Many Sources and Uses
W
E
B
Business
Partners
Business
Partners
Finance
Recipe Management
Formula Equipment
Procedure
EH&S/
Regulatory
Define/Maintain Product and Process Data
Link all Relevant Internal and External
Business Processes
Prod.
Developer
Process
Engineer
Prod..
Planner



By centralizing product definition information, mySAP PLM links the different business processes that
provide input to developing product specifications and the processes which ultimately use the
specifications (for example, manufacturing).
Using SAPs Internet collaboration tools, your suppliers and customers can also be linked to your
product development processes
This eliminates the need to re-key recipe information, reducing effort and errors generated by
duplication of product and formula information
This also provides much greater control over recipe and formula information extending from corporate
design information to data required to produce in the plants.
R&D typically starts the definition of product information.
Other review and input is made by Finance (for costing).
There is a review to ensure compliance with safety regulatory requirements.
Process engineering plays a key role in defining equipment and processing requirements.
Production Planning prepares to manufacture the new product..
All users of PLM information are linked to create a cohesive, streamlined new product development,
approval, rollout, and change management process
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-15
SAP AG 2006
ISA Standard S-88 Recipe Hierarchy
R&D
General Recipe
General Recipe
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Corporate or enterprise level
Specification of materials,
process, and equipment
Set of plants
Address regional requirements
Mfg
Master Recipe
Master Recipe Master Recipe
Master Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Plant-specific level of detail
Managed by PP-PI
Production execution
Batch and equipment level



The design SAP Recipe Management follows the industry standard defined by the World Batch Forum
(ISA standard S-88)
This specification defines a common, hierarchical approach for defining recipe information:
The top two levels are typically created and maintained during product development processes; the
bottom two are used during execution by manufacturing.
The highest level, or general recipe, is location-independent; it applies regardless of plant or
equipment.
The site level typically contains information specific to a set of plants, that is, with common
geography, end requirements, or raw materials.
At master level, the plant and production version recipe resides in and is owned by Production
Planning Process Industries (PP-PI).
At control level is the process order and batch recipe.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-16
SAP AG 2006
Output/Product
Applecin
Input/Ingredient
Whole Grain Oat
Spec-20-5470 91 %
Apple Flavor
Spec-20-2125 0.001%
Salt
Spec-20-1861 0.01 %
Pouch, Foil

Process
Measure or weigh ingredients
and add to make-up tank
Add rework to make-up tank
Blend ingredients
Pass ingredient through metal
detector
Transfer to use tank and
maintain temperature under
constant agitation
Equipment Requirements
Make-up tank with 10 liter
capacity; heat up to 100C
F
o
r
m
u
l
a
Ingredient/
Inputs
Product/
Outputs
Process
Instructions
Equipment
Requirements
F
o
r
m
u
l
a
Recipe
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
Header Data
Header Data
mySAP PLM Recipe Management: Overview



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-17
SAP AG 2006
Managing Product Data: Specifications
Cookie, Applecin, 12 oz.
General:
Kosher
Allergens
Pack Sizes
Snack Pak, 2 oz.
Family, 24 oz.
Institutional, 5 lb.
Composition, Standard
Composition, Label
Nutrition
Daily Requirements
Vitamins & Minerals
OUTPUT: Finished
Product Specs
INPUT: Ingredient Specs
Oil, Soybean
Flavoring, Vanilla
Flour
.
Sugar
Composition
Sucrose 99.997%
Sulfiting Agent - .003%
Granularity .005 mm
Color - 10
Moisture content .01%
Fat Content 17%
nnnn



Specifications are created to capture the detailed properties and characteristics for all
components of your products, including:
Raw materials, ingredients, and all other inputs to the process
Output specifications for both intermediate and finished formulas
Packaging materials
Finished, packaged product
This simple example shows typical properties and characteristics that define inputs to our cookie,
as well as properties desired in the final product.
SAPs specification database (based on EH&S) represents a very flexible, powerful tool for storing
structured product and raw material information.
The physical and chemical properties of the inputs and outputs of your production processes are detailed
to whatever level is required by the particular business and product mix.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-18
SAP AG 2006
Link Between Materials and Specifications
Separation of material and specification provides:
Efficiency A single specification describes a material that may be
used in many different ways
Consistency A material is described by the same specification(s)
everywhere it is used
material A1
(5 gallon)
material A1
(5 gallon)
material A2
(barrel)
material A2
(barrel)
1
1
2
Specification
A
Formulation or
packaging-related
Attributes
Manufacturing
execution attributes
Materials with
different packaging



The link between specifications and the material master illustrates one of the integration points that SAP
built between PLM (development) and Supply Chain Management (SCM) (execution).
Using specifications is an efficient way to define products, because the content of multiple-pack sizes
are described only once.
Consistency is also improved because this same specification (or set of specifications) is used to
describe this unique material wherever it is used.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-19
SAP AG 2006
Product LifeCycle
Management
PLM and SCM Integration
Supply Chain
Management
Recipe Management
Recipe Management
Site recipe
General recipe
Materials, BOMs, master recipe
Manufacturing
execution,
Batch
management
Purchasing,
planning
Quality Management
Inspection
plan
Inspection
lots



One of the strongest differentiators of the SAP PLM solution is its ability to directly drive production
processes through the integration to manufacturing functions.
Key elements of this integration to manufacturing execution include:
Linkage between specifications and the material master
Generation of Production Planning bill of material from the R&D formulation
Creation of the PP-PI (plant) master recipe from the general or site recipe defined by R&D processes
Integration with Quality Management to generate inspection plan characteristics from the R&D
recipe information (specifications)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-20
SAP AG 2006
Concept
Development
Specification
Initiation
Specification
Development
Specification
Conversion
Specification
Management
Initiate Stage
Gate Process
Initiate Stage
Gate Process
Enter Product
Definition
Create Plant
Operating Formula
Change
Management
Link to Materials/
BOM Generation
Specification
Vendor
Collaboration
Label
Management
Recipe
Development
Specification management
Flexible and adaptable to specific
customer requirements
Material master independent product/
raw material definition
Can be used in combination with
SAP PLM and EH&S
Multilevel recipe management
At enterprise, site/area, and plant levels
ISA S88 Standard compliant
Flexible management of dependent info
Composition, nutrition, material list, and so on
Flexible reporting and label generation
functions
Integration with other SAP life cycle
processes
Project Management, Document Management
Vendor/customer collaboration, Quality
Management
Purchasing, Planning, Manufacturing, and
process control
Product Development Lifecycle: Key Capabilities



The product development process in process industries is often called phase-gate.
Some of the key functions of SAPs PLM for process solution that enable the stage-gate product
development process are defined with cross-application tools such as SAP xApp Resource and Portfolio
Management (xRPM) and SAP xApp Product Definition (xPD). The entire new product development
project and process is defined using SAP Project System or cProject functionality, which can be
accessed through Web-based interfaces.
Recipe Management provides for creation and maintenance of specification data required to define
product and packaging details.
One opportunity for collaboration via the Web is in defining ingredient specifications with possible
suppliers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-21
SAP AG 2006
Availability and System Landscape
SAP R/3
RM EH&S
Recipe Management 1.0
Sept. 2001, based on SAP R/3 4.6C
Recipe Management 2.1
March 2003, based on SAP R/3 Ent 1.10 /2.00
Development
system
Production
system
Production
system
Production
S\system
Distribute BOM,
Generate recipe
System landscape
Development and
production in one system
Centralized development
system and decentralized
production systems
RM in mySAP ERP 2004
Available December 2004
Based on SAP ECC 5.0



Centralized development allows customers to keep their production on an earlier SAP R/3 release while
installing PLM on a separate SAP R/3 Enterprise box.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-22
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management 2.1
General
Workbench for integrated maintenance of recipes, formulas, specifications,
equipment and materials
SAP Project System integration for recipe and formula
Enhanced version management: Draft management, explicit replacement
Recipes
Structured process definition including in-process control (QM)
Equipment requirements
Process parameters
PP-PI integration: Master recipe generation
Building blocks
Formula
Nutrition and total solid calculations and standardization
Loss and gains / cost handling
Stream concept for intra-recipe material flow
Formula comparison with Microsoft Excel output function



Recipe Management 2.1 represents a giant leap forward in functionality from its previous release.
Highlights include:
Recipe Developers Workbench: A brand new interface to improve access to development
information (all in one screen) while simplifying the process (favorites, drag and relate)
Integration between RM and SAP Project System to link recipe development to a larger product
development project or program
Improved management of formula changes, using a new version management technique called drafts
Information about process and equipment requirements is stored as structured data at general and site
recipe levels (which will be used to drive generation of master recipe in PP-PI)
Many enhancements have been made in the area of formula calculation, summarization, and display
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-23
SAP AG 2006
New Functionalities in mySAP ERP 2004
EH&S Specification Database
New specification types DIET and DIET_GROUP to address diet
suitability
Access packaging specifications from the recipe workbench
Formula
Enhanced maintenance of inputs and outputs
Calculation of diets, that is, allergens and suitability declarations
Calculation of key figures
Summing up component types
Saving formula data with primary output
Recipe
Enhanced output functionalities
Consistency checks and enhanced user statuses
Managing trials with SAP Recipe Management



Diet suitability: You create diet substances of the specification type diet substance and enter limit
values. If this quantity is exceeded in a formula, you can determine that it is no longer possible to fulfill
the requirements relevant to the diet (for example, low fat or color limitations).
Key figures: Key figures are properties of the primary output of a recipe. The value of the key figures is
the result of various calculations of data in the current formula. The system uses a calculation rule to
determine the value of the key figure.
Trial Management: This component optimizes your product development process from the first trials
and prototypes through to full production. While the functions required for trials are similar to those for
production and quality assurance, a greater degree of flexibility is required for trial planning. Trial
Management supports carrying out a number of different trials and linking to all trial-related areas and
objects.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 1-24
SAP AG 2006
Introduction: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Describe the SAP PLM modules and explain where
Recipe Management fits in the PLM roadmap
Explain how Recipe Management is relevant to
process industries
Describe Recipe Management as part of New
Product Development and Introduction (NPDI)
Describe the history and basis of SAP Recipe
Management




I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-1
SAP AG 2006
Specification
Database:
Basics



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-2
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:
Store and manage specifications, such as
substances and their properties, in the
specification database
Maintain the relationships between substances
and materials in logistics
Search for specification data via the specification
information system
Specification Database: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-3
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database: Specification Database:
Basics Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-5
SAP AG 2006
The development department has developed a
new product.
Your enterprise is now preparing to launch the
product on the market.
All existing information and data is collected
and entered in the specification database.
Specification Database: Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-6
SAP AG 2006
The specification database provides a
placeholder for a complete business
solution for environmental, health,
safety, and Recipe Management
processes.
The specification database is used in the
areas of:
Product safety, Dangerous Goods Management,
Industrial Hygiene and Safety, Waste
Management, Occupational Health, and Recipe
Management
Benefits:
Specification database integrates with Logistics
to produce BOMs, material safety data sheets
(MSDS), labels, and regulatory reports
Considerable reduction in time and money spent
on specification creation
ca.
Goldfarbe
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9leichtentzndlich
highly flammable
facilement
inflammable
tzend
corrosive
corrosif
Testsubstance
Article: 0041504711
Batch: 1234567890
08-19-1998
D: Leichtentzndlich. Reagiert mit Wasser unter Bildung
giftiger und leichtentzndlicher Gase. tzend.
Eingeatmete tzende Substanzen knnen zu einem
toxischen Lungendemfhren.
US: Highly flamable. Contact with water liberates toxic,
highly flammable gas. Corrosive. Inhaled corrosive
substances can lead to a toxic oedema of the lungs.
F: Facilement inflammable. Au contact de l'eau dgage des
gaz toxiques et extrmement inflammables. Corrosif.
L'inhalation de substances corrosives peut provoquer un
oedme toxique pulmonaire.
Specification Database



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-7
SAP AG 2006
Business
Information
Warehouse
Business
Information
Warehouse
Finance
Core
R/3 system
Logistics
(PP,SD,MM,QM)
Finance
Core
R/3 system
Logistics
(PP,SD,MM,QM)
R/3 Human
Resources
R/3 Human
Resources
Complementary
software, xApps
Complementary
software, xApps
The specification database is the backbone for EH&S and RM
Recipe
Management
SAP
PLM
Specification
database
Product
Safety
Waste
Management
Dangerous
Goods
Management
OH /
Industrial
Hygiene
and Safety
Recipe
Management
Specification Database Integration into Logistics



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-8
SAP AG 2006
mySAP PLM and the Supply Chain
Substance
information
system
Internet-based
information
system
MSDS
Supplier MSDS
Supplier
certification
(kosher)
Raw material spec sheets
Vendor information
SOP (standard
operation procedure)
Labels
Storage regulations
Exposure log
Accident management
Waste costing
Workplace monitoring
Standard Operating
Procedure (SOP) shop floor
papers
Workplace information system
with respect to hazardous
substances
Medical examinations
Exposure group monitoring
Site inspections
Shipping documents
Dangerous goods
check
Bills of material
creation
Waste transports
Hazardous waste
manifest
Labels
Supplier
Sales
Purchasing Customer
Production
planning
Production
Shipping
SAP EH&S



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-9
SAP AG 2006
mySAP PLM Specification Database (RM and EH&S)
Waste
Management
Occupational Health
Dangerous Goods
Management
Industrial Hygiene
and Safety
Recipe Management/
Product Safety
Basic Services & Tools *
* Basic Installation of EH&S
Hazardous
Substance
Management



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-10
SAP AG 2006
Materials assignment to substance database
(Logistics integration)
Specification database
Phrase management
mySAP PLM EH&S native language support
Supports almost all common languages
Specification information system
Report generator and report management (WWI)
Report information system
mySAP PLM EH&S expert system
mySAP PLM RM/EH&S Basic Services and Tools
(BS&T)



Functional areas of SAP EH&S basic services and tools
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-11
SAP AG 2006
Specification: Substance Master vs. Material Master
Purchasing
The material master is
a central data object
in the SAP system. It
represents raw materials,
auxiliary materials,
operating supplies,
semifinished products,
finished products, and
production resources/tools.
Material Material
Master Master Record Record
Storage
Warehouse
Management
Classification Accounting
Forecasting
Plant/Storage
Location Stock
Materials
Planning
Work
Scheduling
Calculation Basic Data
Sales and
Distribution
Definition
A B
XX XX



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-12
SAP AG 2006
material A1
(gallon)
material A1
(gallon)
material A2
(barrel)
material A2
(barrel)
1
1
Specification
A
Formulation or
packaging-related
attributes
Manufacturing
execution attributes
Materials with
different packaging
Link Between Materials and Specification
Separation of material and specification provides:
Efficiency Single specification describes a material that may be
used in many different ways
Consistency A material is described by the same specification(s)
everywhere it is used
2



The link between specifications and the material master illustrates one of the integration points that SAP
built between PLM (development) and SCM (execution).
Using specifications is an efficient way to define products, because the content of multiple pack sizes is
described only once.
Consistency is also improved because this same specification (or set of specifications) is used to
describe this unique material wherever it is used.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-13
SAP AG 2006
Link Between Materials and Specification (2)
material A1
(1 gal)
material A1
(1 gal)
material A2
(3 liter)
material A2
(3 liter)
Specification
A
Specification
A
MAT MAT- -01 01 Brilliant Brilliant Silver Silver, 500 ml , 500 ml
MAT MAT- -02 02 Silver Silver Star Star paint paint 1 1 liter liter
MAT MAT- -03 03 Silver Silver Star Star paint paint .5 .5 gal gal
Spec Spec No. No. Name: Name:
D185 D185 Silver Silver Paint Paint
0 1
m n
1 n
m 1
1 1
Material Spec




I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-14
SAP AG 2006
PRODUCT
Properties/attribute 1
Properties/attribute 2
Properties/attribute 3

Product Specification
RAW MATERIAL 3
RAW MATERIAL 2
Raw Material Specification
RAW MATERIAL 1
Properties/attribute 1
Properties/attribute 2

Input and Output Specifications



The EH&S specification database is used to store very detailed product definition information.
It captures detailed characteristics that uniquely describe all materials involved in manufacturing
products.
This includes properties and attributes about finished products, raw materials, and packaging.
The cookie recipe illustrates how detailed information about the formula, ingredients, packaging, and
process would be captured in the specification database.
After a quick review of this information, you will see how this detailed formula and specification
information is captured and managed in the system.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-15
SAP AG 2006
Cookie, Applecin, 12 oz.
General:
Kosher
Allergens
Pack Sizes
Snack Pak, 2 oz.
Family, 24 oz.
Institutional, 5 lb.
Composition, Standard
Composition, Label
Nutrition
Daily Requirements
Vitamins & Minerals
INPUTS: Raw Material Specs
Oil, Soybean
Flavoring, Vanilla
Flour
.
Sugar
Composition
Sucrose 99.997%
Sulfiting Agent - .003%
Granularity .005 mm
Color - 10
Moisture content .01%
Fat Content 17%
nnnn
OUTPUT: Finished Product
Specs
Specification Example



Specifications are created to capture detailed properties and characteristics for all components of your
products, including:
Raw materials, ingredients, and all other inputs to the process
Output specifications for both intermediates and the finished formula
Packaging materials
Finished, packaged product
This simple example shows typical properties and characteristics that define inputs for our cookie, as
well as properties desired in the final product.
SAPs specification database (based on EH&S) represents a very flexible, powerful tool for storing
structured product and raw material information.
The physical and chemical properties of the inputs and outputs of your production processes are detailed
to whatever level is required by the particular business and product mix.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-16
SAP AG 2006
Specification
Specification
Descriptive/
Identification Information
- Internal/common names
- Chemical name
Physical Characteristics
- Form (e.g., film)
- Color (e.g., yellow, clear)
- Odor (e.g., odorless)
Physical & Technical Properties
- PH-value
- Viscosity
- Sieve analysis
- Percent active substance
Additional Data
Additional Data
Naming/Identity
- Internal chemical description
- Trivial names
- CAS-nr and reg. of recyclable substances
- INCI-name
Approved Manufacturers
and Trade Names
Certificate Terms
Physical/Chemical Data
- Safety valuation
- Ecotox valuation
- Work safety data
Specification Data
Processing Specs
- Production technology, processes
- Storage stability



Specifications represent a much more detailed view of a material than is available using the material
master.
Early in the product creation process, developers typically work in terms of specifications, without
worrying about material masters.
Specifications are used to define any material (or substance) requiring very detailed description of
characteristics and properties
The specification database is built on SAPs classification system, so definition of characteristics and
properties is highly flexible.
Once the product development is almost complete, and time for ordering goods approaches, material
masters are defined and referenced by the specifications spelled out as inputs and outputs in the formula.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-17
SAP AG 2006
Raw
material
data sheet
(absorbent)
Publish via
Web
Vendor add
specification
Vendor spec
accepted and
imported
Vendor Spec
Reviewed
Raw Material Specifications
Film, Supreme, Printed
Adhesive

Absorbent Material 175mm


Absorbency 15
Thickness 175mm
Slit Width - .0235
Safety Number 10

Collaboration with the Vendor



Product information, such as specifications, can be shared with your business partners by using the
Internet.
The example consumer company intends to publish specifications for a new raw material to a set of
potential suppliers.
The suppliers will submit their proposed material and specifications, along with pricing information.
The properties of this purchased material will then be imported into the specification database, and will
be accessible to other business processes, such as Quality Management (for example, to measure quality
of raw materials upon receipt).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-18
SAP AG 2006
Packaging Specification Example
Property Tree for Spec Type = Wrap
+ Roll Finishing
- Roll Diameter (in) Min. Max. (numeric)
- Roll Weight (lb) Max. (numeric)
- Splice Type (phrase)
- Roll Wind Position (pick list)
+ Instructions
- Packing (phrase, drawing)
- Special (text)
+ (Other Property)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-19
SAP AG 2006
Data Concept for Specification Database in
Chemical, Pharmaceutical, and CPG industries
PRODUCT
(FERT)
LIST_SUB
Data objects Product Safety/RM
A
A Assignment N:1
Composition 1:n
B
B
B
B
LIST_SUB
LIST_SUB
B
B
M
a
t
.

(
1
0
0
k
g
)
M
a
t
.

(
7
5
k
g
)
M
a
t
.

(
5
0
k
g
)
REAL_SUB
(ROH)
REAL_SUB
(HALB)
B
B
B
B
INPUT
Specification
INPUT
Specification
OUTPUT
Specification
REAL_SUB
(HALB)
REAL_SUB
(ROH)
LIST_SUB
INPUT
Specification
OUTPUT
Specification
B
B
B
B
A
A
B
B



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-20
SAP AG 2006
Specification Concept for SAP PLM EH&S
Bill of Material (BOM)
To design input and output specifications for Recipe Management,
always discuss with MM and PP resource.
Mat.0003
(Product)
Raw
Mat.0005
Raw
Mat.0004
Material Type HALB (Input/Output Specification)
Semifinished products are intermediates (manufactured in-
house).
The BOM contains mixtures, but no packaging.
Material Type FERT (Output Specification)
Finished products are produced in-house. Since they cannot be
ordered by Purchasing, a material master record of this material
type does not contain purchasing data.
The BOM contains mixtures and packaging.
Material Type ROH (Input Specifications)
Raw materials are always procured externally and then
processed.
A material master record of this type contains purchasing
data, but not sales data, since raw materials cannot be sold.
Finished/intermediate Materials
= Output Specification
Mat.0002
(Packaging)
Mat.0001



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-21
SAP AG 2006
The material type ROH does not have a BOM in Logistics. The
specification type RAW_SUB has a material assignment and can
carry fx physical/chemical and toxicological data, but no regulatory
data based on lists.
Specification Concept for SAP PLM EH&S (2)
Raw Material in EH&S/Input Specifications
This should to be discussed with the responsible Product Safety contact.
(LIST_SUB) (LIST_SUB)
Spec.0005
RAW Spec.
The dissolution of the raw material into chemical substances
happens only in EH&S/RM. The specification type LIST_SUB is
introduced for the maintenance of regulatory data.
The listed substance LIST_SUB carries list-based information,
such as exposure limits or notification status. Its properties
are inherited (no compositions !!) into the pure substance.
Regulatory data can be purchased and uploaded from data
providers, e.g., Ariel. It is possible via the usage-specific
inheritance to assign several listed substances to one raw
substance.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-22
SAP AG 2006
Specification database expandable by the user, for example, by adding
new properties, useable in all industries
Data stored can be made available in many languages by using phrase
management
Automatic data derivation by SAP EH&S expert
Referencing possible between different specifications
Change management and change documents
Import/export Interfaces
Maintaining additional information on properties
Maintaining references between specification
Providing a link to SAP R/3 Materials Management
Specification Database: Features



Change management lets you perform the following measures for specifications:
Import of value assignments
Creation of substances
Maintenance of substances
The data is assigned a validity period based on the change number. Therefore, data can be searched
either by change number or key date.
The user can create his/her own properties (classes).
To reduce the amount of data that needs to be entered for a substance, specification management allows
you to create reference substances for the specification category Substance, the properties of which
can be inherited.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-23
SAP AG 2006
Specification Workbench
Application Area Toolbar
Navigation Area
Detail Area
Menu



Toolbar: The navigation functions are available in this part of the screen. You can personalize the
functions to your requirements in the specification workbench.
Navigation: In this part of the screen, you can call objects that you wish to display or edit. In addition,
you can call search images for the individual object types.
Detail structure: The object that has been chosen will be displayed in detail in this part of the screen.
You can choose individual parts of the object to display and edit them in the application area. For
example, the specification for a property tree will be displayed here and you can choose the properties
for the value assignment in the application area.
Application area: The following functions are available in this part of the screen:
You can enter search criteria when searching for an object of a particular object type.
The specifications found after the search according to specifications will be displayed in a hit list;
you can choose the specifications to be edited and transfer them to the navigation area.
You can edit an object that you have chosen from the navigation area, detail area, or hit list.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-24
SAP AG 2006
Specification Database
Product Safety (MSDS)
Dangerous Goods Management
Waste Management
Specification Database
Substance
Packaging
Nutrients
Equipment
Waste Codes
Exposure
Dangerous Goods
Industrial Hygiene and Safety
Nutrition Composition
The specification database is a central location and flexible
instrument for managing and maintaining properties and
information on:
Nutritional composition
Chemical substances and preparations
Certifications (kosher, organic, and so on)
Physical properties (moisture, PH)
Packaging components



The EH&S specification database forms the basis for an integrated environment management system.
It is the central location for storing manifold information relating to the different specification
categories.
The respective specification category is preset depending on the EH&S component in which data
maintenance is started.
For example, all information on chemical substances and preparations created in Product Safety will be
stored in the specification category Substance.
The specification database provides the link between substances and materials that is necessary for
logistics purposes.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-25
SAP AG 2006
Process Overview Edit Specification
Specification
Info system
Copying function:
Data of one
specification is
transferred to
another one
without the data
being connected in
any way afterwards
Referencing
function: Data of
one specification is
transferred to
another and the
data being
connected to each
other
Inheritance: Works
the same way as
referencing, but
has a large number
of additional
functionalities
Automatic
maintenance of
properties in the
specification
database
Based on the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool
Tools provided for
supporting the
creation of work-
flow definitions
within SAP EH&S
Product Safety by
the customer
Sample workflow
delivered on the
basis of which
customers can
create their own
workflow
definitions
Knowledge of the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool
necessary to define
your own
processes in EH&S
Product Safety
Specification
database is divided
into header
information and
properties
information.
Header information
has Restrictions,
Identifiers,
References,
Material
assignment, and
Status.
Properties can be a
composition
property, a phrase
property or a value
property.
The application of
rules to already
existing EH&S data
is processed to
derive new data
that are written
back to the EH&S
substance
database.
Rules are based on
facts that can be
deliberately
defined. Facts are
linked to EH&S
data, for example,
characteristics,
identifiers, usage,
and validity area.
EH&S wxpert rules
are processed
quickly and
effectively in the
EH&S wxpert rules
editor. Individual
rules are combined
to form sets of
rules.
The specification
information system
enables you to
search for
substances with
predefined
properties and to
present the results
of the search in the
form of output lists.
After entering the
search criteria, you
will obtain a list
with substances
that fulfill these
criteria. You can
select substances
and display
detailed
information (for
example, using
Microsoft Excel).
Using
Expert Rules
Workflow
Copying,
Referencing,
Inheritance
Manual
Data Entry



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-26
SAP AG 2006
Specification Category Substance:
Data Maintenance at the Front End
The following header data is maintained in the system:
Specification Header
Restrictions
Identifiers
References
Material Assignments
Status
Relationships
The following item data is maintained in the system:
Properties that are assigned values by one or
several data records



The items listed in the header data are individual tab pages. You can maintain different data in each of
these.
Properties are listed in a property tree from which you branch off to a new window with different tab
pages for maintaining data.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-27
SAP AG 2006
Substance (Transaction CG02): Header Data



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-28
SAP AG 2006
Regulatory Regulatory List List
Usage Usage
Specification Specification Type Type
Specification Category Specification Category
Specification Category Substance:
Header Overview
Specification Specification Key Key
Status Status
Restrictions Restrictions
References References
Substance Nature Substance Nature
Relationships Relationships
Material Material Assignments Assignments
Identifiers Identifiers
Header Data
Item Data



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-29
SAP AG 2006
Header: Specification Header
REAL_SUB REAL_SUB Real Substance Real Substance
PRE_NOPOLY PRE_NOPOLY Preparation w/o Polymer Preparation w/o Polymer
Colors Colors
Substances belonging to Substances belonging to
business unit colors business unit colors
Created by/on, last Changed by/on Created by/on, last Changed by/on
change number, valid from/to change number, valid from/to
(From number range) (From number range) 000000000012 000000000012
D182 D182
Substance Substance
Specification Specification
Key Key
Specification Specification
Type Type
Substance Nature Substance Nature
Authorization Authorization
Group Group
Administration Administration
Specification Specification
Category Category



The specification category is the initial screen in the transaction.
The specification key is either assigned by the system or you can assign it yourself.
The substance nature is an optional item of information that specifies whether or not a substance is a
polymer, or whether or not a preparation contains a polymer.
The authorization group controls via authorization management the group of persons that is
permitted to edit this substance.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-30
SAP AG 2006
Specification Header: Specification Categories
Specification Categories:
Waste Code
Agents (noise, dust)
Dangerous Goods Classification
Substance (Listed Substance, Real Substance)
Packaging (box, barrel, bottle)
Each specification category has its own transaction.
A specification can be assigned to several specification
categories.



The following settings depend on the specification category:
Specification type
Identification type
Identification listing
User exits (for example, search in initial screen)
Component type
Regulatory lists
Define groups (for example, output methods)
Authorization group
User-defined text
Sources
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-31
SAP AG 2006
Specification Header: Spec Types



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-32
SAP AG 2006
Specification Header:
Specification Type (Overview)
Chromous Salts
Substance Category Definition
Listed Substance
Substance that is described
in a regulatory list
Listed Substance
Group
Grouping of listed
substances from a logical
point of view
Real Substance
Substances that are physi-
cally present in an enter-
prise and that correspond to
a material in logistics
Real Substance
Group
Grouping of real substances
from a logical point of view.
Example
Acetone
Silver Paint
Bronze Paint
Copper Oxide
Metallic Paint
Functionality
Listed substances cannot be
assigned to materials; they can
be used as reference substances
Listed substances that have
the same/referenced
properties from a legal
point of view
Real substances can be
assigned to a material
Substance can be referenced to
common substance properties
UN Listed
Substance
Legal data for Dangerous
Goods Management
Dangerous Goods
Classification
Legal rating of dangerous
goods
1263 (Paint)
Classification Key:
CL_PAI_00_99
All legal provisions of the
different regulations are
assigned to a UN-listed
substance
Assigns a unique dangerous
goods classification to all
dangerous goods



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-33
SAP AG 2006
Header: Restrictions
Who is allowed to view the specification data?
First, authorizations are maintained via the authorization
groups (maintained on the Specification Header tab page).
On the Restrictions tab page, you can maintain ratings and
validity areas. These are used as additional information on
the authorization group.



Here, rating and validity areas have another functionality other than with the identifiers and the value
assignments/properties.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-34
SAP AG 2006
Specification: Restrictions



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-35
SAP AG 2006
Header: Identifiers
NAM NAM
(Name) (Name)
DE DE Aceton Aceton
DE DE Dimethylketon Dimethylketon
: :
Identification Cat. Lang. Identifiers
1 1
2 2
Sort.
NUM NUM
( (Number Number) )
200 200- -662 662- -2 2
67 67- -64 64- -1 1
: :
1 1
2 2
FRM FRM
( (Formula Formula) )
C3H6O C3H6O
: :
1 1
: :
: :
: :
2 2 CH3 CH3- -CO CO- -CH3 CH3
SYN SYN
SYN SYN
Ident.Type
EINECS EINECS
CAS CAS
SUM SUM
RAT RAT
SYN SYN EN EN Acetone Acetone 1 1



There are three identification categories:
NAM (Name)
Identification types of the NAM category are maintained in the respective language.
NUM (Number)
For the identification type NUM, a syntax check is provided which checks, if the syntax (3 numbers,
hyphen, 3 numbers, hyphen, one number) is correct.
FRM (Formula)
Any number of identifiers can be stored for a substance.
Different identification types, which control the output of identifiers on reports, can be defined for each
identification category, for example:
IUPAC name, product name, trivial name, synonym (SYN) ... for names
A substance list, such as EINECS number, CAS number ... for numbers
SUM (empirical formula) or RAT (rational formula) for formulas
From this tab page, you can call the functions List Assignment and Usage for each individual identifier.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-36
SAP AG 2006
NAM NAM
(Name) (Name)
Identification Cat.
NUM NUM
( (Number Number) )
SYN SYN Aceton Aceton
SYN SYN Acetone Acetone
Ident.Type Language Identifiers
EINECS EINECS 200 200- -662 662- -2 2
CAS CAS
DE DE
EN EN
67 67- -64 64- -1 1
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
List
EINECS EINECS
EINECS EINECS
CAS CAS
EINECS EINECS
CAS CAS
: :
Identifiers: Assignment to Substance Lists



A particular substance is listed by certain names, numbers, or formulas; this information is maintained
by assigning identifiers to substance lists. Such a list can be the legal EINECS list or another company-
specific list for a particular business unit. This does not mean that a regulatory list is provided by the
system!
Identification Type SYN = Synonym
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-37
SAP AG 2006
Identifiers: Usage
: :
: :
NAM NAM
(Name) (Name)
Identification Cat. Identifiers
NUM NUM
( (Number Number) )
SYN SYN
SYN SYN
Ident.Type
EINECS EINECS
CAS CAS
Language
DE DE
EN EN
Aceton Aceton
Acetone Acetone
200 200- -662 662- -2 2
67 67- -64 64- -1 1
:
:
Usage
Public/DE Public/DE
Public/GB Public/GB
Internal Internal/ /world world
Internal Internal/DE /DE
:
:



With Usage, you specify the rating (public, internal) and the validity areas of a particular identifier.
You can control which identifiers are to be shown on a report (for example, Active indicator).
The functions Rating and Validity Area are used the same way as for the value assignment to properties.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-38
SAP AG 2006
Specification: Identifiers



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-39
SAP AG 2006
Header: Material Assignment
Spec. Key
D182 D182
D185 D185
: :
Name
Yellow Yellow Paint Paint
Silver Silver Paint Paint
Y Y- -300 300 Yellow Yellow paint paint in in cans cans
: :
Y Y- -351 351 Yellow Yellow paint paint 1l 1l can can
Y Y- -352 352 Yellow Yellow paint paint 5 l 5 l can can
Y Y- -353 353 Yellow Yellow paint paint 1 l 1 l can can
S S- -01 01 Brilliant Brilliant Silver Silver, 500 ml , 500 ml
: :
S S- -02 02 Silver Silver Star Star paint paint 1 l 1 l
S S- -03 03 Silver Silver Star Star paint paint 5 l 5 l
Material Key Material Key Material Name Material Name
: :
: :



Usage
In SAP Product Safety, you use this function to assign a deliberate number of materials from the
material master to a substance, thus allowing a link to further logistic processes.
Logistic data such as price, weight, and measurements are stored with the material. This data is
dependent on the packing size or containers.
The substance provides the data on the substance properties. This data is independent of packing size
or containers.
If the material is marked as environmentally relevant and a delivery is posted for this material, SAP
R/3 checks if the material has been assigned to a substance for which a material safety data sheets
has to be issued and, if necessary, starts the material safety sheet shipping.
Prerequisites
The materials have to be created in the Materials Management material master.
All materials for which a material safety data sheet has to be shipped are to be marked as
environmentally relevant in the Basis Data 2 view.
The substance has to belong to a substance category for which the Material Assignment indicator has
been set in the IMG activity Define Substance Categories.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-40
SAP AG 2006
Substances: Material Assignments



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-41
SAP AG 2006
Header: Status
PROHIBITIONS by Status
PROHIBITIONS by Status
What am I
allowed to
do in this
specifiation?
?
?



Ratings and validity areas can be maintained.
With value assignments and identifiers for which these ratings and validity areas apply, activities are
not to be performed according to the status.
For each status entry, a responsible person can be maintained in the system for information (integration
into mySAP ERP Human Capital Management).
Prohibitions can be made with regard to:
Changes
Output on a report
Warnings in case of changes
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-42
SAP AG 2006
Status Network
IB In process
K1,K2... User status
ZF To be released
FR Released
UA Uncritical change
Header: Status: Status Network
K3 K3
K2 K2
ZF
ZF
U
U
FR
FR
K1 K1
IB
IB



Between IB and ZF, customer-defined status can be added, for which the subsequent status can be
defined as required .
Value assignment types can be assigned to each status; these must first be processed before going to the
next status.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-43
SAP AG 2006
Validity Validity Area Area
Validity Validity Area Area Cat Cat. .
Rating Rating
Substance Substance Key Key
Specification Category Substance: Item Overview
Header Data
Item Data
Properties Properties Group Group
Properties Properties Tree Tree
Characteristics Characteristics
Data Data Records Records
Value Value Assignment Assignment
Composition Composition
Specification Specification Listing Listing
Source Source
User User- -Defined Defined Text Text
Assessment Assessment
Usage Usage
Property Property



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-44
SAP AG 2006
Objects for All Substances
Risk phrases
4711 E F Highly flammable
D F Leichtentzndlich
Substance
Value type Properties
Compositions
Phrase type Properties
Phrase library
Value
56.1 C
242 hPa
-18 C
Condition
(at 1 bar)
(at 20C)
Properties
Boiling point
Vapor pressure
Flash point
Substance: Acetone
98.0 %
1.3 %
0.7 %
0.1 %
Composition: Acetone (technical)
Acetone
Methanol
Water
Residual
Substances to be monitored for: Superglue
Acetone
Methanol
...........
Acetone
(technical)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-45
SAP AG 2006
Properties Group
Physical Physical/ /Chemical Chemical
Data Data
Medicine Medicine
: :
Property
:
Properties Tree
Position: Substance Properties
:
:
:
State of Matter State of Matter
Color Color
Odor Odor
Density Density
First First Aid Aid Eye Eye
First First Aid Aid Skin Skin
Hints Hints for for Physician Physician: Symptoms : Symptoms



To improve structuring, properties (classes) can be assigned to properties groups.
Properties groups are ordered logically in the tree.
The standard properties tree has 13 groups showing all properties.
Other properties trees may have other properties groups and show not this many properties. The MSDS
properties tree provides 16 properties groups, which are structured according to the material safety data
sheet.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-46
SAP AG 2006
Characteristic Value Assignment
Physical Physical/ /Chemical Chemical Data Data
Density
Value Value 0,97 g/cm3 0,97 g/cm3
Temperature Temperature 20 C 20 C
Method Method
: :
:
:
Characteristic Value Assignment
Color
Color Color CED CED- -09.00201600 Red 09.00201600 Red
: :
: : :
:
: :
Position: Characteristics and Value Assignments



Various characteristics can be assigned to a property (class).
You can assign one or several values to a characteristic. For each value assignment, a data record is
created, up to a maximum of 99.
Value assignment types can be set in Customizing by means of control flags in such a way that, for
example, a value assignment is not shown in the properties tree (if only meant for internal use).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-47
SAP AG 2006
Position: Characteristics and Value Assignments (2)



The following values can be assigned to a characteristic:
A numeric value and a measuring unit (to be entered directly)
A numeric value range and a measuring unit (to be entered directly)
A phrase (to be selected from a phrase set)
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-48
SAP AG 2006
Composition Composition
Standard Composition
Spec. Key Avg.Val.
T.LI.501 T.LI.501 2 2
T.LI.502 T.LI.502 25 25
T.LI.503 T.LI.503 8 8
Lower Limit
>= 1 >= 1
>= 23 >= 23
>= 7 >= 7
% %
% %
:
Spec. Key
T.LI.502 T.LI.502
T.LI.503 T.LI.503
:
Dangerous Ingredients
Avg.Val.
>= 20 >= 20
>= 5 >= 5
Exp.
% %
SOLVENT SOLVENT
SOLVENT SOLVENT
SOLVENT SOLVENT
SOLVENT SOLVENT
ACT_AGENT ACT_AGENT
Comp.Type
Comp.Type
Exp.
T.LI.501 T.LI.501 N,N N,N- -dimethylaniline dimethylaniline
T.LI.502 T.LI.502 Xylol Xylol, , mixed mixed isomers isomers
T.LI.503 Phenol T.LI.503 Phenol
Position: Characteristics and Value Assignment
Components
% %
Lower Limit
% %
<= 30 <= 30
<= 10 <= 10
Upper Limit
< 3 < 3
<= 27 <= 27
<= 9 <= 9
Upper Limit



In addition to or instead of the value assignment to characteristics, a composition can be maintained
depending on the value assignment type category (for example, for the property Chemical Nature or the
property Composition Based on Products).
The composition is a quantitative listing of the ingredients, with the component type (abbreviated
Comp.Type), average value (abbreviated Avg.Val), lower limit, and upper limit being specified in
addition to the specification key .
The order in which items are displayed and printed on a report can be specified by a sort sequence.
For all components for which no values are given for concentration or quantity, exceptional values can
be used. Here, a unknown or not measured will be displayed instead of a value.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-49
SAP AG 2006
Substance: Composition Property Components



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-50
SAP AG 2006
Substance: Compositions



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-51
SAP AG 2006
Exact Composition Based on Products
Usage Rating
:
PLANT PLANT
:
INTERNAL For INTERNAL For int.use int.use only only
Labeling
Usage Rating
PUBLIC PUBLIC Rel.w Rel.w/o /o restr restr. .
: :
REGION REGION
USA USA
:
US US
:
1. Datensatz 1. Datensatz
2. Datensatz 2. Datensatz PUBLIC PUBLIC Rel.w Rel.w/o /o restr restr. .
Density
Usage
:
REGION REGION
:
PUBLIC PUBLIC Rel.w Rel.w/o /o restr restr. .
Position: Extra Usage
Rating Validity Cat. Validity Area
REG_EG REG_EG
Validity Cat. Validity Area
REG_World REG_World
Validity Cat. Validity Area
REG_World REG_World



Further usage of data in reporting is controlled by entering ratings and validity categories together with
the validity area.
Ratings specify the group of persons for which documents are meant, for example, for the public, for
authorities, or only for internal users.
Validity categories in connection with validity areas specify the geographic validity. In addition to the
validity category Region, organizational units can be selected (for example, Plant).
Possible validity areas for the validity category Region are worldwide, Europe, ADR, and so on.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-52
SAP AG 2006
Position: Extra Usage (2)



The Active indicator must be set so that the appropriate usage can be taken into account when selecting
data for the report! Please pay attention to the fact that each time the data record is changed, you must
reset the Active indicator.
If you have made relevant changes to a data record, you must set the Relevancy indicator in the usage.
This then leads to a new report being created with a new main version, which is subject to subsequent
shipping. The relevant change can be marked on the corresponding report.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-53
SAP AG 2006
Physical Physical/ /Chemical Chemical Data Data
Density
Source Source Note
Hollemann, A.F., Hollemann, A.F., Wiberg Wiberg, E., , E., Wiberg Wiberg, Nils: , Nils: Page 20 Page 20
Textbook Textbook of of Inorganic Inorganic Chemistry Chemistry
Position: Extra Source and User-Defined Texts
User-def. text type L User-defined text
: :
Remarks Remarks Die Gltigkeit ist eingeschrnkt, weil .... Die Gltigkeit ist eingeschrnkt, weil .... DE DE
Remarks Remarks The The validity validity is is limited limited because because .... .... EN EN
Inspection Inspection cond cond. . When When measuring measuring the the density density of of acetone acetone.... .... DE DE



You can assign sources or user-defined texts, including remarks, on the data record measurement
results.
User-defined text depends on the respective language. Translations are not maintained centrally as in
phrase management, but have to be entered individually for each user-defined text.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-54
SAP AG 2006
Position: Extra Source



Souces are maintained in a separate list.
The maintained sources can be selected in the item data and can be supplemented by source notes. The
source is a user-defined text which, for example, can specify the page number of a book.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-55
SAP AG 2006
Position: Extra User-Defined Text



User-defined texts depend on the language. Translations are not maintained centrally as in phrase
management but must be entered individually for each user-defined text. Each language requires ist own
item.
There are various types of user-defined text. You can define with which user-defined text type a
document from the document management system can be integrated.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-56
SAP AG 2006
Position: Addition Assessment
0 Not assessed
1 Valid without restrictions
2 Valid with restrictions
3 Invalid
4 Not assessable



Each value assigment in SAP Product Safety has an assessment.
In Customizing of Product Safety you define a standard assessment, which is automatically assigned to
each created value assignment by the system. If necessary, you can change change this value
assignment.
These value assignments are only additional information; they do not include any control functions.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-57
SAP AG 2006
Function: Where-Used List
Where are you?
Proof of usage for components,
transport classifications, and references



In the Utilities menu, you can start the where-used list dialog from the hit list.
By means of the where-used list, you can find substances that contain substances selected on the hit list
in one or several of the following ways:
The selected substances are contained as components in substance compositions and/or substance
listings.
The selected substances are defined as reference substances.
The selected substances are specified in transport classification.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-58
SAP AG 2006
Function: Change Document Log



Any changes made to data in the specification database are logged.
From the hit list in the Extras menu, you can start the activity Creation of Change Documents Log.
The creation of change documents is done by a job that collects all changes that have been made within
the last 24 hours.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-59
SAP AG 2006
Value Value Assignment Assignment Value Value Converted Converted Value Value Unit Unit
Function: Convert Unit of Measurement
Value
Temperature
Value
Temperature
Value Value Assignment Assignment Value Value Converted Converted Value Value Unit Unit
6,7 hPa
20 C
6,7 hPa
20 C 68,00 F F



The system can convert numerical values with measurement units that have been assigned as values to
characteristics and saved into other measurement units within the same dimension.
This function can be started by choosing Edit Properties from the Extras menu.
The conversion is only made for informational purposes.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-60
SAP AG 2006
Set User Defaults



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-61
SAP AG 2006
You should now be able to:
Store and manage specifications, such as
substances and their properties, in the specification
database
Maintain the relationships between substances and
materials in logistics
Search for specification data via the specification
information system
Specification Database: Unit Summary



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-62
Exercises with Solutions



Unit 2: Specification Database Structure
Topic: Specification Basics



At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
View a specification hit list based on your selection criteria
Set user parameters

1-1 Exercise steps.
1-1-1 Enter selection criteria.
1-1-2 Refine hit list by entering additional criteria.
1-1-3 Delete search criteria and search again using different criteria.
Note: Your instructor will explain what to use where the ______ are seen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-63

1-2 Search for specification.
1-2-1 Start transaction CG02 (Substance Workbench) and the Edit Specification: Initial
Screen will be displayed. Double-click on Substance in the left pane.


1-2-2 Enter *apple* in the Name field in the Identifier area.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-64
1-2-3 Choose Hit List and the Specification Hit List screen will be displayed.


Refine the hit list to show only the specification(s) that should be viewed (this will
be a subset of the list of specifications shown in exercise 1-1).
1-2-4 Choose Refine Selection and the Edit Specification: Refine Selection screen
will be displayed.
1-2-5 Replace *apple* with *apple pieces* in the Name field in the Identifier area.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-65

1-2-6 Choose Hit List and the Edit Specification: Hit List screen will be re-displayed
with only the appropriate specification(s) shown.


Restart the search with no limiting criteria and perform your own searches.
1-2-7 Choose Exit twice and the Edit Specifications search screen will be displayed.
1-2-8 Choose Delete Search Criteria and your last entry, ________,
will be removed,
1-2-9 Choose Hit List and a window will be displayed warning you about long run
times when searching without any criteria.


1-2-10 Choose Yes and the Specification Information System dialog box will be displayed.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-66

1-2-11 Choose Hit List and the Edit Specification: Hit List screen will be displayed
with all of the specifications that are in the database.


1-2-12 Identify some information on specifications that you can search for by looking at
the identifiers in the product name, CAS name, and/or CAS number column(s).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-67

1-2-13 Choose Exit and the Edit Specifications search screen will be displayed.


1-2-14 Enter the criteria that will allow you to find the specifications you identified in the
previous step.
1-2-15 Choose Hit List and a window will be displayed warning you about long run
times when searching without any criteria.
1-2-16 Choose Extend Selection , Refine Selection , and Reduce Selection to
see how you can change the specifications that are displayed on the hit list.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 2-68

2-1 Saving the user settings and specify user parameters.
2-1-1 Choose SystemUser ProfileOwn Data.


2-1-2 In the Parameters tab, specify values for the properties tree Sales organization, the
Distribution channel, the Division, and the properties tree for EH&S.


Note: The properties tree FOOD_DEV corresponds to the RM-specific properties
tree. The sales organization 3020 means USA Denver, the distribution channel 10
means Final customer sales, and the division 00 means cross-division.

Parameters Value
EHS: Properties tree ES6 FOOD_DEV
Sales organization VKO 3020
Distribution channel VTW 10
Division SPA 00
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-1
SAP AG 2006
Phrase
Management



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-2
SAP AG 2006
At the end of this unit you will be able to:
Manage phrases
Prepare phrases for use when entering data in the
specification database
Phrase Management: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-3
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database
Advanced:
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process, and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-5
SAP AG 2006
Your enterprise works on an international level. It
has purchased a phrase library in different
languages for assigning values to its substances.
This library has been imported into the EH&S
specification database and is now available for data
entry purposes.
Further text modules are required for the new
substance and they now need to be created.
Phrase Management: Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-6
SAP AG 2006
Centralized text management
Import of commercial phrase libraries
Tailoring of phrase libraries
Assignment of texts to substance properties
Texts for reports, for example, MSDS, labels,
and so on
Phrase Management: Use



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-7
SAP AG 2006
IUCLID IUCLID
Your Own Phrases Your Own Phrases Your Own Phrases
CED CED CED
...
...
EH&S EH&S
Phrase Management: Phrase Library Scenario



Phrase management is used to manage and maintain your own and purchased phrase libraries. It is
possible to set up your own library.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-8
SAP AG 2006
EH&S EH&S
Phrase Library Active
CED CED
Customer Customer X X
IUCLID IUCLID
...
Phrase Management: Assignment Libraries
Centralized text management
Import of commercial phrase libraries
Tailoring of phrase libraries
Assignment of texts to substance properties
Texts for reports, for example, MSDS, labels, and so on



Each phrase is assigned to a phrase library.
In EH&S, several phrase libraries can be managed in parallel.
In phrase management, only one library can be set up as the active library. This library is used to
assign values to properties. All other libraries are passive, but are available for reference purposes.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-9
SAP AG 2006
Phrase Library Phrase Group
EHS EHS 07.00 07.00
EHS EHS 15.00 15.00
EHS EHS 11.00 11.00
: :
EHS EHS 07.00 07.00
EHS EHS 07.00 07.00
EHS EHS 15.00 15.00
EHS EHS
Phrase Key
0031 0031
5202 5202
2222 2222
:
0032 0032
0033 0033
4712 4712
4711 4711 15.00 15.00
Description
7. Handling... 7. Handling...

11. 11. Toxicology Toxicology
:
and ... and ...
Storage Storage

15. Regulations 15. Regulations
Phrase Groups



A phrase library is divided into one or more phrase groups.
A phrase group combines phrases of a library according to logical points of view to make is easier to
search for and manage phrases (a kind of table of contents). It is not identical to the phrase set.
You can assign a phrase to only one phrase group.
The description provides more information on the phrase group.
The phrase key uniquely identifies a phrase. It is assigned by the system, or you can assign it yourself.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-10
SAP AG 2006
Value Value Assignment Assignment Phrases Phrases
Report Text Report Text Phrases Phrases
Packaging Packaging Procedures Procedures
Nutrition Nutrition Information Information
Label Graphics Label Graphics
... ...
Phrases: Definition
Phrase: Standardized text that is to assign
values and reporting in multiple
languages.



A phrase is a standardized text that can be used either for value assignment to properties or as text
modules for reports.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-11
SAP AG 2006
Item
Header
Phrases: Structure
Phrase Key
Note
Phrase Group
Phrase Text
Phrase Code
Graphic Element
Language
Phrase Library
Phrase Set Phrase Set
Phrase Status
Date of Change



The phrase header contains information on the phrase library, phrase group, and phrase key.
Phrase items comprise the text, the data of last change, the phrase status, the code, the graphic element
and the note all information for one language each.
A phrase can be assigned to phrase sets.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-12
SAP AG 2006
Header
Phrase Header
Phrase Phrase Key Key
Phrase Phrase Group Group
Phrase Phrase Library Library
EH&S EH&S- -N04.00018088 N04.00018088
The complete phrase key:



The phrase header contains information about the phrase library, phrase group, and phrase key.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-13
SAP AG 2006
:
Phrase Text
Leichtentzndlich Leichtentzndlich
Facilement inflammable Facilement inflammable
Highly flammable Highly flammable
:
Fcilmente inflamable Fcilmente inflamable
Bleiverbindungen knnen oral, ber die Haut ... Bleiverbindungen knnen oral, ber die Haut ...
Lead compounds may be absorbed by ingestion Lead compounds may be absorbed by ingestion, ... , ...
Les composs Les composs de de plomb peuvent tre absorbes plomb peuvent tre absorbes ... ...
Composti Composti di piombo potrebbero essere assorbiti di piombo potrebbero essere assorbiti ... ...
Phrase Key
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
Phrase Item: Phrase Text
DE DE
FR FR
EN EN
:
ES ES
DE DE
EN EN
FR FR
IT IT
Language



The phrase text is stored in various languages. Texts in languages that are not based on the Western
European character set (such as Greek, Russian, or Kanji) can also be output if the appropriate settings
are made.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-14
SAP AG 2006
Language Date of Change
06.08.2001 06.08.2001
07.08.2001 07.08.2001
07.08.2001 07.08.2001
:
Phrase Key
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
:
Phrase Item: Date of Change
Phrase Key
FR FR
EN EN
DE DE
:
Language



The phrase text is stored in various languages. Texts in languages that are not based on the Western
European character set (such as Greek, Russian, or Kanji) can also be output if the appropriate settings
are made.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-15
SAP AG 2006
:
Phrase Text
Leichtentzndlich Leichtentzndlich
Facilement inflammable Facilement inflammable
Highly flammable Highly flammable
:
Fcilmente inflamable Fcilmente inflamable
Bleiverbindungen knnen oral, ber die Haut ... Bleiverbindungen knnen oral, ber die Haut ...
Lead compounds may be absorbed by ingestion Lead compounds may be absorbed by ingestion, ... , ...
Les composs Les composs de de plomb peuvent tre absorbes plomb peuvent tre absorbes ... ...
Composti Composti di piombo potrebbero essere assorbiti di piombo potrebbero essere assorbiti ... ...
Phrase Key
EHS EHS- - N09.4711 N09.4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
:
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222
Phrase Item: Phrase Text
DE DE
FR FR
EN EN
ES ES
DE DE
EN EN
FR FR
IT IT
Language



The phrase text is stored in various languages. Texts in languages that are not based on the Western
European character set (such as Greek, Russian, or Kanji) can also be output if the appropriate settings
are made.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-16
SAP AG 2006
Lang
DE DE
FR FR
EN EN
ES ES
DE DE
EN EN
FR FR
IT IT
Phrase Text Change Date Status
Leichtentzndlich Leichtentzndlich 07/23/2003 07/23/2003 03 03
Facilement Facilement inflammable inflammable 09/29/2003 09/29/2003 04 04
Highly Highly flammable flammable 04/04/2004 04/04/2004 01 01
Fcilmente Fcilmente inflamable inflamable 01/20/2004 01/20/2004 02 02
Bleiverbindungen knnen oral, ber die Haut ... Bleiverbindungen knnen oral, ber die Haut ...
Lead Lead compounds compounds may may be be absorbed absorbed by by ingestion ingestion, ... , ...
Les Les composs composs de de plomb plomb peuvent peuvent tre tre absorbes absorbes ... ...
Composti Composti di di piombo piombo potrebbero potrebbero essere essere assorbiti assorbiti ... ...
Phrase Key
PHR PHR- - N09.4711 N09.4711
000000002222 000000002222
Phrase Item: Phrase Text and Status
01 In process
02 Processed externally
03 Released
04 Historical
Phrase Status Phrase Status



The phrase text is stored in various languages. Texts in languages that are not based on the Western
European character set (such as Greek, Russian, or Kanji) can also be output if the appropriate settings
are made.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-17
SAP AG 2006
Status
DE DE
FR FR
EN EN
:
01 01
02 02
03 03
:
Phrase Key
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
:
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711 ES ES 04 04
01 In process
02 Processed externally
03 Released
04 Historical
Language
Phrase Item: Status



Status assignment is optional.
The status defines if a phrase item:
a: Is allowed to be processed
b: Is allowed to be output on a report
c: Is allowed to be used for value assignment to specifications with warning
d: Is allowed to be assigned another status
Standard status:
Status 01: Identifier a + d
Status 02: Identifier d
Status 03: Identifier b + d
Status 04: Identifier b + c
When importing/exporting phrases, you can choose a status by means of the language selection so that
the status as chosen via the language selection is taken with the import, not the file status or with the
export not the SAP system status.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-18
SAP AG 2006
Phrase Key Phrase Code Language
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711 F F DE DE
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711 FR FR
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711 EN EN
: : :
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711 ES ES
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222 DE DE
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222 EN EN
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222 FR FR
EHS EHS- - N09. 2222 N09. 2222 IT IT
Note
:
Zu verwenden fr ... Zu verwenden fr ...
To To be be used used for for ... ...
F F
F F
F F
Phrase Item: Phrase Code and Note



An abbreviation that refers to the phrase code can be stored in the Phrase Code field. Phrase codes are
laid down by law only for a few specific phrase texts, for example, for hazard symbols (F, Xn, and so
on), R phrases (R10, R20, and so on), and S phrases (S20, and so on). In most cases, the Phrase Code
field will remain blank. The phrase code can be output in reports independent of the phrase text.
In the Note field, you can store user-defined texts that provide information on how the respective phrase
is to be used, for example. The phrase note appears in the substance database under Phrase selection and
is not output on a report.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-19
SAP AG 2006
Phrase Key
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
: :
EHS EHS- - N09. 4711 N09. 4711
EHS EHS- - N09. 4712 N09. 4712
EHS EHS- - N09. 4712 N09. 4712
EHS EHS- - N09. 4712 N09. 4712
EHS EHS- - N09. 4712 N09. 4712
Language
DE DE
FR FR
EN EN
:
ES ES
DE DE
EN EN
FR FR
IT IT
GS_F.BMP GS_F.BMP
GS_C.BMP GS_C.BMP
GS_F.BMP GS_F.BMP
GS_F.BMP GS_F.BMP
GS_F.BMP GS_F.BMP
GS_C.BMP GS_C.BMP
GS_C.BMP GS_C.BMP
GS_C.BMP GS_C.BMP
Phrase Item: Graphic Element
Graphic Element



You can assign graphic elements to all phrases.
Enter the complete file name of your graphic element with the file extension in the Graphic Element
field. The system uses these file names when you create a report.
The files must be stored in a specified directory either on the network or on the local PC.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-20
SAP AG 2006
ABC Corp
Factoryville
Company
Customer Corp.
Main Street 321
Industry Town
EXTRATHION-S
Harmful
Gesundheits-
schdlich
Contains: Malathion
Enthlt: Malathion
E Flammable. Harmful
by inhalation and if
swallowed. Avoid
contact with skin and
eyes.
D Entzndlich. Gesund-
heitsschdlich beim
Einatmen und beim
Verschlucken.
Berhrung mit
der Haut und mit den
Augen vermeiden.
Texts, codes, and graphic
elements from phrase
management
Phrases: Use in Nutritional Labels and Product Labels



Texts from phrase management appear on a nutritional labels, for example, as headings, R Phrases, or
information on substances such as Flammable, Xn, or as graphic symbols.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-21
SAP AG 2006
Phrase 1
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Phrase 2
Phrase 3
Phrase 3
Phrase 4
Phrase 4
Phrase Set 4
Phrase Set 4
Phrase Set 5
Phrase Set 5
:
:
Phrase Set 1
Phrase Set 1
Phrase Set 2
Phrase Set 2
Phrase Set 3
Phrase Set 3
Phrase 5
Phrase 5
Phrase 7
Phrase 7
Phrase 6
Phrase 6
Phrase 8
Phrase 8
:
:
Phrase Sets



Phrases can be used to assign values to properties only if they have been assigned to a phrase set. These
phrase sets are grouped together according to logical points of view.
Phrases that have not been assigned to a phrase set cannot be used for value assignment.
A phrase can be assigned to more than one phrase set.
In general, a phrase set contains a number of phrases.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-22
SAP AG 2006
Phrase Set: Management
Phrase Set Language Phrase Set Description
SAP_EHS_1015_002_Advice DE Advice
SAP_EHS_1015_002_Advice DE Advice
SAP_EHS_1015_002_Advice DE Advice



Phrase set management is also possible from phrase editing, from either the hit list of phrases or from
the phrase set assignment.
Editing of individual phrase sets is started via a search screen.
A hit list is generated.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-23
SAP AG 2006
Item
Header
Phrase Set: Structure
Language Language
Phrase Phrase Assignment Assignment
Phrase Set Phrase Set Description Description
Description Description
Management Management Data Data
Language Language Key Key
Note Note
Phrase Set Key Phrase Set Key



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-24
SAP AG 2006
Phrase Set Phrase Set
Language
SAP_EHS_1023_001_SYMBOL
Gefahrensymbol Gefahrensymbol DE DE
Phrase Set Description
Symbol Symbol EN EN
: :
Language
SAP_EHS_1023_001_R_PHRASE
R R- -Stze Stze DE DE
Phrase Set Description
R R phrases phrases
EN EN
: :
: :
Phrase Set: Phrase Set Description



The phrase set description is used to search and manage phrase sets.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-25
SAP AG 2006
Phrase Set Phrase Set
Sort
SAP_EHS_1023_001_SYMBOL
EHS EHS- -4712 4712 1 1
Phrase
EHS EHS- -4711 4711 3 3
: :
Sort
SAP_EHS_1023_001_R_PHRASE
8 8
9 9
: :
Phrase Text
Phrase Phrase Text
Corrosive Corrosive
High High flammable flammable
:
11 11
EHS EHS- -3214 3214
EHS EHS- -3092 3092
Explosive Explosive when when dry dry. .
Risk Risk of of explosion explosion by by shock shock, , friction friction, , fire fire or.. or..
EHS EHS- -3125 3125 Forms Forms very very sensitive explosive ... sensitive explosive ...
: : :
Phrase Set: Assigning Phrases



A number of phrases can be assigned to a phrase set. The display sequence of the phrases in phrase
selection in the substance database is determined by the sort sequence.
Assignment of phrases can also be performed from the phrase.
You can then assign phrases to a phrase set.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-26
SAP AG 2006
Characteristic
Source Source
User User- -Defined Text Defined Text
Assessment Assessment
Usage Usage
Data Records Data Records
Value Assignment Value Assignment
Properties Tree Properties Tree
Substance Key Substance Key
Phrase Set: Specification Phrase Assignment
Composition Composition
Specification Listing Specification Listing
Header Data
Item Data
Language Language
Phrase Assignment Phrase Assignment
Phrase Set Phrase Set Descrip Descrip. .
Phrase Set Key
Properties Group Properties Group
Property Property
Validity Area Validity Area
Validity Area Cat. Validity Area Cat.
Rating Rating



Phrase sets are assigned to a characteristic in the Properties tree. Only the phrases that are assigned to
this phrase set can be used to assign values to the respective characteristic.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-27
SAP AG 2006
Phrase Set: Editing Phrase Assignments



The assignment of characteristics to a phrase set can be edited in a separate transaction.
The Match Characteristics function determines all characteristics of the data type CHAR30, thus
allowing to be assigned phrases to.
These characteristics are transferred to the characteristic phrase set assignment where they can assign
respective phrase sets. At the same time, all characteristics that are still contained in the assignment but
no longer exist in SAP R/3 will be deleted.
Perform this function after you have created new characteristics for a class of the class type 100 (value
assignments) in the Classification System.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-28
SAP AG 2006
Subst Subst. 000000000004 . 000000000004
Substance Substance: D182 : D182
EHS EHS- -700100 700100 Flammable Flammable
SAP EHS 1011 001 SAP EHS 1011 001
SAP EHS 1011 001 SAP EHS 1011 001
01.01.0001 01.01.0001
01.01.0001 01.01.0001
Phrase Management
PR-RC-1 Red Paint
Possible Hazards (Summarized MSDS)
31.12.9999 C3380405 0001
SAP_EHS_1011_001_ADVICE
PR-GC-1 Gold Paint
Possible Hazards (Summarized MSDS)
31.12.9999 C5003819 0001
SAP_EHS_1011_001_ADVICE
Phrases: Function Where-Used List
Subst. 000000000004



The where-used list is an additional feature in phrase management.
The where-used list checks whether a phrase was already used for value assignment or as text module in
a report. This enables you to determine whether and how you can further process a phrase.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-29
SAP AG 2006
Passive 1
e.g., CED
Passive 2
e.g., IUCLID
Passive 3
e.g., Provider
EH&S
Active Active
Phrase Library Phrase Library
EHS EHS- -N09.4711 N09.4711
Substance: Gold Paint
Hazard Symbol:
Highly Flammable
IUCLID
Zulieferer
Import
Merge
(reference)
Phrases: Function Merging Phrases
CED



Phrases are managed in phrase libraries, where one of the libraries is used as an active library for data
maintenance.
Passive libraries are used to display and print external data, not to enter data.
Commercial libraries with regular updates, such as the CED library, should be loaded as passive
libraries to make handling more efficient. Passive phrases that are to be used for data entry can be
included in the active library by means of a reference. Setting up of this reference is referred to as
merging.
A change to a passive phrase is not automatically transferred to the active phrase library. If a phrase
reference exists, the user has to actively trigger the update of the phrase reference. This means that a
phrase reference behaves differently than a reference between substances!
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-30
SAP AG 2006
EHS- N04. 417710
EN Consult your physician.
EHS- N04. 417710
EN Consult your physician.
EHS-N04.600060
EN Consult your physician.
EHS-N04.600060
EN Consult your physician.
EHS- N04. 168602
EN Consult your physician.
EHS- N04. 168602
EN Consult your physician.
Phrase: Function Combining Phrases in the
Active Phrase Library
Before Combining After Combining
EHS- N04.168602
EN Consult your physician.
EHS- N04.168602
EN Consult your physician.



Phrases in the active library with the same content can be combined to form one phrase. In the first step,
all phrases to be deleted are replaced by the required phrase in the substance database. Then the phrases
which are no longer used are deleted.
Hint: Generate a where-used list first!
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-31
SAP AG 2006
Where Where- -Used List Used List
Active phrases, used Active phrases, used
Assignment to phrase
set is deleted
Active phrase, not used Active phrase, not used
Assignment to phrase set
is deleted; a copy is
stored in the recycle bin
Passive phrase, used Passive phrase, used
Passive phrase, not used Passive phrase, not used
Is deleted from the passive
library; a copy is stored in
the recycle bin
Phrases: Function: Deleting Phrases



Deleting phrases depends on how they are used.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-32
SAP AG 2006
You should now be able to:
Manage phrases
Prepare phrases for use when entering data in the
specification database
Phrase Management: Unit Summary



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-33
Exercises with Solutions



Unit 3: Phrase Management
Topic: Phrases and Phrase Sets



At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Create a phrase for an existing phrase set
Update a specification for to include this new phrase

1-1 Exercise steps.
1-1-1 Create a phrase and assign it to a phrase set.
1-1-2 Assign the phrase to a specification.
Note: Your instructor will explain what to use where the ______ are seen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-34
2-1 Create a phrase and assign it to the a phrase set.
2-1-1 Start transaction CG12 (Edit Phrase).


2-1-2 Choose Create and the Create Phrase: Header screen will be displayed.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-35
2-1-3 Enter RM_FOODLB in the Phrase group field and enter your phrase text, Orange
Color, in the Phrase text field. Choose Phrase Item and the Edit Phrase:
Items screen will be displayed.
Note: Translations of the text of this phrase can be edited and maintained in this
screen.


2-1-4 Choose Phrase Set Assignment and the Edit Phrase: Phrase Set
Assignment screen will be displayed.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-36
2-1-5 Enter phrase set SAP_EHS_1013_008_VALUE in the Phrase set field and choose
Save . The phrase will be saved.


2-1-6 Choose Exit twice and the SAP main screen will be displayed.


Edit specification to assign the phrase created in 1-1
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-37
2-1-7 Start transaction CG02 (Substance Workbench) and the Edit Specification: Initial
Screen will be displayed. Double-click on Substance on the left of screen.


2-1-8 Enter RM Training in the Specification field. Choose Hit List and the
Specification Hit List screen will be displayed with only your specification listed.


2-1-9 Choose to get a full screen.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-38
2-1-10 Double-click to get the header information.


2-1-11 Select the Identifiers tab to see the name and number identifiers.
2-1-12 Right-click and choose Property Tree.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-39
2-1-13 Choose Property Tree and the Edit Specification:Property Tree screen will be
displayed.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-40
2-1-14 Click on the specification number and choose Expand Subtree. All properties will
be displayed.


2-1-15 Page down until you see the Color value assignment.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-41
2-1-16 Double-click on this line and the Edit Specification: Value Assignment screen will
be displayed.


2-1-17 Select the Method field and the F4 help button will be displayed. Choose F4
help and the list of available phrases will be displayed. Use the black arrows to
scroll to the top line and select the phrase.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 3-42
2-1-18 Chose your phrase and press ENTER. The Edit Specification: Value Assignment
screen will be redisplayed with your phrase key assigned. Press ENTER and the
phrase text will be displayed.


2-1-19 Choose ENTER and save the phrase.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-1
SAP AG 2006
Specification
Database:
Advanced



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-2
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:
Store and manage specifications, such as substances
and their properties, in the specification database
Maintain relationships between substances and
materials in logistics
Search for specification data via the specification
information system
Specification Database: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-3
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database: Specification Database:
Advanced Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-5
SAP AG 2006
The development department of your enterprise has
developed a new product.
You are now preparing to launch the product on the
market.
All existing information and data needs to be
collected and entered into the specification
database.
Specification Database: Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-6
SAP AG 2006
Edit Specification Process Overview
Specification
Info system
Copying function:
Data of one
specification is
transferred to
another one
without the data
being connected in
any way afterward.
Referencing
function: Data of
one specification is
transferred to
another with the
data being
connected.
Inheritance: Works
the same way as
referencing, but
has a large number
of additional
functionalities.
Automatic
maintenance of
properties in the
specification
database
Based on the general
SAP R/3 workflow
tool
Tools provided for
supporting the
creation of work-
flow definitions
within SAP EH&S
Product Safety by
the customer
Sample workflow
delivered, on the
basis of which
customers can
create their own
workflow
definitions
Knowledge of the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool is
necessary to define
your own
processes in EH&S
Product Safety
The specification
database is divided
into header
information and
properties
information.
Header information
has Restrictions,
Identifiers,
References,
Material
assignment, and
Status.
Properties can be a
composition
property, a phrase
property, or a value
property.
The application of
rules to already
existing EH&S data
is processed to
derive new data
that is written back
to the EH&S
substance
database.
Rules are based on
facts that can be
deliberately
defined. Facts are
linked to EH&S
data, for example,
characteristics,
identifiers, usage,
and validity area.
EH&S expert rules
are processed
quickly and
effectively in the
EH&S expert rules
editor. Individual
rules are combined
to form sets of
rules.
The specification
information system
enables you to
search for
substances with
predefined
properties and to
present the results
of the search in the
form of output lists.
After entering the
search criteria, you
will obtain a list
with substances
that fulfill these
criteria. You can
then select
substances and
display detailed
information (for
example, using
Microsoft Excel).
Using
Expert Rules
Workflow
Copying,
Referencing,
Inheritance
Manual
Data Entry



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-7
SAP AG 2006
Copying, Referencing, and Inheriting
Referencing
Copying
Inheriting
Data from Substance A Data to Substance B
Data from Substance A Data to Substance B
Data from Substance A Data to Substance B



By means of the copying function, data of one specification is transferred to another without the data
being connected in any way afterward.
By means of the referencing function, data of one specification is transferred to another and the data is
connected afterward. With any change of the original data, the data in the referenced specification is
also changed.
Inheritance is a new function in release 2.7. It works the same way as referencing, but has a number of
additional functionalities.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-8
SAP AG 2006
Copying



A substance must have been created, that is, a specification type, specification key, and identifier should
have been entered.
Select the Copy function from Template in the hit list.
The source specification identifies from where the data is to be copied.
The template is a filter that controls which data is to be copied.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-9
SAP AG 2006
Copying: Copy Template



From the Copy templates screen, you can enter edit mode.
First, you have to create a copy template (header data).
Via the detail view, you can select which data is to be copied. You can choose:
Usage data
Identifiers
Value Assignment Types
In addition, you can choose certain change options

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-10
SAP AG 2006
Copying: Copy Template Change Options
Changes to Target Specifications
Deact. Inheritance Relationships
Inheritance Excluded
?
?
?



Changes to Target Specifications Allowed
Specifies that the target data of the value assignment instances that have been inherited from the
respective inheritance template to a target specification can be temporarily overwritten by the user.
Any changes to source data affects the related target data.
Inheritance Excluded
Specifies that the target data of the value assignment instances that have been inherited from the
respective inheritance template to a target specification can be permanently overwritten by the user.
The user is allowed to overwrite data of value assignment instances locally. This local value
assignment is not overruled by the SAP system and can be inherited by further independent targets.
You can undo the local overwriting by deleting the respective value assignment instance; the system
then shows the original status.
Deactivation of Inheritance Relationship Allowed
Specifies that the user is allowed to deactivate or activate the inheritance relationship in the header
data of the source or target specification as need arises.
If the inheritance relationship was deactivated and the source data is changed, the target data will not
be updated and can be overwritten. If the relationship will be activated again, the target data will be
updated according to the data of the source specification.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-11
SAP AG 2006
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing
Substance C
Referencing
Substance C
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 3
Reference
Substance 3
Reference
Substance 4
Reference
Substance 4
Reference
Substance 2
Reference
Substance 2
Substance E
Substance E
Referencing
Substance D
Referencing
Substance D
Header: References



Referencing is used to transfer properties from one or more reference substances to one or more other
referencing substances.
This considerably reduces the amount of data that you need to enter or change.
Referencing is only possible on one level. This means that substance D (above) cannot be used as a
reference substance for another substance.
However, several reference substances can transfer properties to a referencing substance. For example,
reference substance 1 and reference substance 3 can transfer to referencing substance A.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-12
SAP AG 2006
Header: References (2)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-13
SAP AG 2006
Header: References (3)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-14
SAP AG 2006
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing
Substance B
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 1
Referencing: Inheritance to Several Referencing
Substances
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
transfers to



All properties with all value assignments that are maintained for the reference substance are transferred
to the referencing substances without exception. All properties stored in the Properties tree, including
the addition information that is inherited. Identifiers or material assignments are not transferred.
Transferring these properties means referencing rather than copying. A link is created from all value
assignments of the reference substance to the referencing substance. This means that the properties are
only displayed at the level of the referencing substances and cannot be changed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-15
SAP AG 2006
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing
Substance B
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 1
Referencing: Changes in the Referencing
Substance
Density: 1,00 g/cm3
Density Density: 1,00 g/cm3 : 1,00 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Density: 1,00 g/cm3
Density Density: 1,00 g/cm3 : 1,00 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Density: 1,00 g/cm3
Density Density: 1,00 g/cm3 : 1,00 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
transfers to



Referencing properties are changed centrally in the reference substance, which has an immediate effect
on the referencing substances. Any change to the density for reference substance 1 is immediately
visible in referencing substances A and B.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-16
SAP AG 2006
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 1
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling: Labeling: Xn Xn ... ...
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing: Individual Value Assignment to
Properties
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Color: silver
Color: bronze
transfers to



Other properties that are not set as default by the reference substance can be individually maintained in
the referencing substance. In this example, the property color is individually maintained in the
referencing substances A and B.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-17
SAP AG 2006
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing: Overwriting Referenced Value
Assignments
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Density: 1,05 g/cm3
Density: 1,05 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...
Color: silver
Color: bronze
transfers to
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 1
Density: 0,97 g/cm3
Density Density: 0,97 g/cm3 : 0,97 g/cm3
First aid eye:
Rinse with plenty of water
First First aid aid eye eye: :
Rinse Rinse with with plenty plenty of of water water
Labeling: Xn ...
Labeling Labeling: : Xn Xn ... ...



Referenced properties can be overwritten in the referencing substance. In this case, the new value
assignment (for example, the density of 1,05 g/cm3 in referencing substance B) overrides the transferred
value assignment. However, the reference to the value assignment of the reference substance is retained.
If the new information that overwrote the values from the reference substance was deleted, the inherited
information would become valid again.
Caution: If the density in reference substance 1 is changed, this change will not be visible in
referencing substance B because the density was overwritten.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-18
SAP AG 2006
Referencing: Transferring Properties from a
Number of Reference Substances
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 1
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance A
Reference
Substance 3
Reference
Substance 3
Density
Density Density
Labeling
Labeling Labeling
First Aid
First First Aid Aid
:
: :
Standard
Composition
Standard Standard
Composition Composition
Color
Color Color
:
: :
Extinguishing
Media
Extinguishing Extinguishing
Media Media
Protective
Equipment
Protective Protective
Equipment Equipment
:
: :
Value Assignment Types
transfers to
transfers to



If a substance is to inherit data from two reference substances, values must not be assigned for the same
properties in these reference substances. If labeling was maintained in reference substance 1 and in
reference substance 2, an error message would be displayed with assignment.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-19
SAP AG 2006
Reference
Substance 1
Reference
Substance 1
Header: Inheritance
Referencing
Substance A
Referencing
Substance A
Level 1
Referencing
Substance B
Referencing
Substance B
Level n
Inheritance Templates
Inheritance Templates
Inheritance Templates
Inheritance Templates



Inheritance templates are used to control which data is to be inherited:
Value assignment types
Identifiers
Restrictions with regard to the usage of inherited data
Deactivate/activate inheritance relationship
Set permission to overwrite value assignment types
Multi-level inheritance is possible.
Inheritance can be requested.
Inheritance may be subject to permission.
A report runs the inheritance as a background job.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-20
SAP AG 2006
Inheritance
Specification 2
Specification 2
Specification 3
Specification 3
Specification 1
Specification 1
Inherited to
Requests Inheritance
New Possibilites:
Multiple inheritance
Inheritance in two directions
Approving an inheritance
Inheritance
Template
Inheritance
Template



The inheritance template is equivalent to the copy template.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-21
SAP AG 2006
Inheritance: Inheritance Status
Inheritance Status
Initial
Ready for Inheritance
Consistent
Faulty
Initial
Approval Status
Requested
Approved
Approved
Approved
Rejected

X



The approval status is only used in certain combinations with the inheritance status.
Only if an inheritance request has been approved can the inheritance relationship status change from
INITIAL to READY FOR INHERITANCE.
If source data of an already consistent inheritance relationship is modified, the status changes from
CONSISTENT to READY FOR INHERITANCE.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-22
SAP AG 2006
Inheritance: Inheritance Template
Inheritance
Template
Be Be careful careful when when changing changing ! !



If an inheritance template is used in an inheritance relationship, the template can only be changed in
such a way that already inherited data will not be deleted.
If templates are used, a warning is displayed.
Changes that are not allowed will not be permitted by the system.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-23
SAP AG 2006
Edit Specification Process Overview (2)
Specification
Info system
Copying function:
Data of one
specification is
transferred to
another one
without the data
being connected in
any way afterward.
Referencing
function: Data of
one specification is
transferred to
another one and
the data is
connected
afterward.
Inheritance: Works
the same way as
referencing, but
has a large number
of additional
functionalities.
Automatic
maintenance of
properties in the
specification
database
Based on the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool
Tools provided for
supporting the
creation of work-
flow definitions
within SAP EH&S
Product Safety by
the customer
Sample workflow
delivered on the
basis of which
customers can
create their own
workflow
definitions
Knowledge of the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool
necessary to define
your own
processes in EH&S
Product Safety
The specification
database is divided
into header
information and
properties
information.
Header information
has Restrictions,
Identifiers,
References,
Material
assignment, and
Status.
Properties can be a
composition
property, a phrase
property, or a value
property.
The application of
rules to already
existing EH&S data
is processed to
derive new data
that is written back
to the EH&S
substance
database.
Rules are based on
facts that can be
deliberately
defined. Facts are
linked to EH&S
data, for example,
characteristics,
identifiers, usage,
and validity area.
EH&S expert rules
are processed
quickly and
effectively in the
EH&S expert rules
editor. Individual
rules are combined
to form sets of
rules.
The specification
information system
enables you to
search for
substances with
predefined
properties and to
present the results
of the search in the
form of output lists.
After entering the
search criteria, you
will obtain a list
with substances
that fulfill these
criteria. You can
then select
substances and
display detailed
information (for
example, using
Microsoft Excel).
Using
Expert Rules
Workflow
Copying,
Referencing,
Inheritance
Manual
Data Entry



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-24
SAP AG 2006
EH&S Workflow
Data is changed in the
Properties tree
Data Data is is changed changed in in the the
Properties Properties tree tree
Customer-defined
workflow
From the Workflow view, data
is edited in EH&S
From From the the Workflow Workflow view view, , data data
is is edited edited in EH&S in EH&S
SAP SAP
modules modules
Tools Tools for for supporting supporting
the the creation creation of a of a
workflow workflow module module



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-25
SAP AG 2006
EH&S Workflow: Example
Change in the property flash point in the substance bronze paint Change in the property Change in the property flash point flash point in the substance bronze paint in the substance bronze paint
Information to the persons responsible (work item):
Which substance affected? Bronze paint
Which properties to be checked?
Labelling
Why? Change document
Information to the persons responsible (work item): Information to the persons responsible (work item):
Which substance affected? Which substance affected? Bronze paint Bronze paint
Which properties to be checked? Which properties to be checked?
Labelling Labelling
Why? Why? Change document Change document
Processing of the work item by the person responsible:
For example, adding the hazard symbol F or changing the
R phrases
Processing of the work item by the person responsible: Processing of the work item by the person responsible:
For example, adding the hazard symbol F or changing the For example, adding the hazard symbol F or changing the
R phrases R phrases
Entering a remark after work item concluded Entering a remark after work item concluded Entering a remark after work item concluded
Changing of labeling can trigger new workflow Changing of Changing of labeling labeling can trigger new workflow can trigger new workflow



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-26
SAP AG 2006
EH&S Workflow: Technical Process
Changing of property, substance header, identifiers,
material-substance assignment, or reference list fulfills
trigger event of the start condition
Changing of property, substance header, identifiers, Changing of property, substance header, identifiers,
material material- -substance assignment, or reference list fulfills substance assignment, or reference list fulfills
trigger event of the start condition trigger event of the start condition
Start condition checked by report RC1WFSUB
for each substance (for example, one per night)
Start condition checked by report RC1WFSUB Start condition checked by report RC1WFSUB
for each substance (for example, one per night) for each substance (for example, one per night)
Workflow started for all substances that fulfill start condition Workflow started for all substances that fulfill start condition Workflow started for all substances that fulfill start condition
Work item created for each property defined in the
task profile for each substance
Work item created for each property defined in the Work item created for each property defined in the
task profile for each substance task profile for each substance
Work item shipped to the responsible person
defined in the workflow
Work item shipped to the Work item shipped to the responsible person responsible person
defined defined in the workflow in the workflow



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-27
SAP AG 2006
Edit Specification Process Overview (3)
Specification
Info system
Copying function:
Data of one
specification is
transferred to
another one
without the data
being connected in
any way afterward
Referencing
function: Data of
one specification is
transferred to
another and the
data is connected
afterward
Inheritance: Works
the same way as
referencing, but
has a large number
of additional
functionalities
Automatic
maintenance of
properties in the
specification
database
Based on the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool
Tools provided for
supporting the
creation of work-
flow definitions
within SAP EH&S
Product Safety by
the customer
Sample workflow
delivered on the
basis of which
customers can
create their own
workflow
definitions
Knowledge of the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool is
necessary to define
your own
processes in EH&S
Product Safety
The pecification
database is divided
into header
information and
properties
information.
Header information
has Restrictions,
Identifiers,
References,
Material
assignment, and
Status.
Properties can be a
composition
property, a phrase
property, or a value
property.
The application of
rules to already
existing EH&S data
is processed to
derive new data
that is written back
to the EH&S
substance
database.
Rules are based on
facts that can be
deliberately
defined. Facts are
linked to EH&S
data, for example,
characteristics,
identifiers, usage,
and validity area.
EH&S expert rules
are processed
quickly and
effectively in the
EH&S expert rules
editor. Individual
rules are combined
to form sets of
rules.
The specification
information system
enables you to
search for
substances with
predefined
properties and to
present the results
of the search in the
form of output lists.
After entering the
search criteria, you
will obtain a list
with substances
that fulfill these
criteria. You can
then select
substances and
display detailed
information (for
example, using
Microsoft Excel).
Using
Expert Rules
Workflow
Copying,
Referencing,
Inheritance
Manual
Data Entry



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-28
SAP AG 2006
EH&S Expert: Introduction
SAP EH&S Expert:
A flexible tool for the automated derivation of
EH&S data by use of rules
Example:
R Phrase: R10 Flammable 21 C Flash point 55 C



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-29
SAP AG 2006
EH&S Expert: Configuration Overview
EH&S
Expert
server
Database
Front end
Application
server
EH&S
Expert
Rule sets
Facts
...
Rules
If ...
Then...
Facts
...
Rules
If ...
Then...
Facts
...
Rules
If ...
Then ...
Mapping tables
EH&S
EH&S



Components of SAP EH&S Expert
EH&S Expert server
The application of rules to already existing EH&S data is processed to derive new data that is written
back to the EH&S substance database.
EH&S Expert rules and rule sets
Rules are based on facts that can be deliberately defined. Facts are linked to EH&S data, for
example, characteristics, identifiers, usage, and validity area. EH&S Expert rules are processed
quickly and effectively in the EH&S Expert rules editor. Individual rules are combined to form sets
of rules.
Mapping tables
Mapping tables are needed to assign the facts used in rules to EH&S fields, and to assign the internal
phrase keys used to the phrase keys in EH&S.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-30
SAP AG 2006
EH&S Expert: Features
Flexible
Independent of the respective SAP R/3 system
No fixed programming of rules in EH&S (not hard-coded)
Integration of external rule systems possible
Easy to use
Simple rule syntax
Graphical user interface
Use of the standard user exit secondary data determination
Powerful tool
Mapping of complex situations
Dependent rules possible



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-31
SAP AG 2006
EH&S Expert: Example
EH&S Expert
EH&S EH&S Expert Expert
ComputeFP
FP(IN)
Rphrase(Out)
...
...
IF 21 <= FP <= 55
THEN
R-Phrase := R10
END
...
Substance 1
Flash point = 50C
R phrase
Call up
IN read facts
OUT write facts
= 50
= R10
= R10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-32
SAP AG 2006
Edit Specification Process Overview (4)
Specification
Info system
Copying function:
Data of one
specification is
transferred to
another one
without the data
being connected in
any way afterward
Referencing
function: Data of
one specification is
transferred to
another and the
data is connected
afterward
Inheritance: Works
the same way as
referencing, but
has a large number
of additional
functionalities
Automatic
maintenance of
properties in the
specification
database
Based on the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool
Tools provided for
supporting the
creation of work-
flow definitions
within SAP EH&S
Product Safety by
the customer
Sample workflow
delivered, on the
basis of which
customers can
create their own
workflow
definitions
Knowledge of the
general SAP R/3
workflow tool
necessary to define
your own
processes in EH&S
Product Safety
The pecification
database is divided
into header
information and
properties
information.
Header information
has Restrictions,
Identifiers,
References,
Material
assignment, and
Status.
Properties can be a
composition
property, a phrase
property, or a value
property.
The application of
rules to already
existing EH&S data
is processed to
derive new data
that is written back
to the EH&S
substance
database.
Rules are based on
facts that can be
deliberately
defined. Facts are
linked to EH&S
data, for example,
characteristics,
identifiers, usage,
and validity area.
EH&S Expert rules
are processed
quickly and
effectively in the
EH&S Expert rules
editor. Individual
rules are combined
to form sets of
rules.
The specification
information system
enables you to
search for
substances with
predefined
properties and to
present the results
of the search in the
form of output lists.
After entering the
search criteria, you
will obtain a list
with substances
that fulfill these
criteria. You can
then select
substances and
display detailed
information (for
example, using
Microsoft Excel).
Using
Expert Rules
Workflow
Copying,
Referencing,
Inheritance
Manual
Data Entry



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-33
SAP AG 2006
Specification Information System:
Research in the Specification Database

Yellow Paint
Flash Point: 19C
Silver Paint
Flash Point: 20C
Bronze Paint:
Flash Point: 15C
EH&S
EH&S
Flash Point < 21C
Flash Point < 21C
?
?
?
?
?
?



The specification information system enables you to search for substances with predefined properties
and to present the results of the search in the form of output lists.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-34
SAP AG 2006
1. .......................
2. .......................
3. .......................
4. .......................
5. .......................
Input Search Criteria
Hit List with Substances Select Substances
1. .......................
2. .......................
3. .......................
4. .......................
5. .......................
List of Results
Process Principle: Specification Information
System



After entering the search criteria, you will obtain a list with substances that fulfill these criteria. You can
then select substances and display detailed information (for example, using Microsoft Excel).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-35
SAP AG 2006
Administration Administration Data Data
Identifiers Identifiers
Material Material
Specification Specification
with with Properties Properties
Specification Specification
with with Components Components
Material Key Material Key or or Material Short Text Material Short Text
Extended Extended Search Search Functions Functions ( (can can be be supplemented supplemented) )
Usage Usage
Number Number
Formula Formula
Name Name
Specification Specification Key Key
Flash Point: Flash Point: z.B. < 21C z.B. < 21C
Density Density: : e.g e.g. 0,9 . 0,9 - - 1,1 g/cm3 1,1 g/cm3
Hazard Hazard Symbol: Symbol: e.g e.g. T, . T, toxic toxic
Xylene Xylene, Mixed , Mixed Isomers Isomers
Rating Rating: : public public
Validity Validity Area Area Cat Cat.: REGION .: REGION
Validity Validity Area Area: World : World
Search Criteria



In addition to searching for administration data, identifiers, and materials that are assigned to a
substance, you can use extended search functions that can be supplemented with additional, customer-
specific search functions. One example of an extended search function is searching for substances with
specific properties, such as flash point, density, or hazard symbol.
Note: You can also search generically for identifiers by using placeholders such as *.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-36
SAP AG 2006
Combining Searches
Hit List
Yellow Paint
Aluminium Oxide
Search Search 1 1
Search Search 2 2
Search Search 3 3
And
Refine
Selection
Flash Point < 21C
Color:
Yellow
OR
Extend
Selection
Search Search 2 2
Name: Silver
Reduce
Selection
Name:
Aluminium*
Hit List
Yellow Paint
Silver Paint
Hit List
Yellow Paint
Silver Paint
Aluminium Oxide
Hit List
Yellow Paint



You can refine your search by entering additional search criteria in a second search step, thus starting an
and search.
You can extend searches by entering new search criteria in a second search step, thus starting an or
search.
You can reduce the number of findings on a hit list by entering a search criterion in another step; all
listed results that meet this new criterion will be deleted from the list.
You can also undo search steps.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-37
SAP AG 2006
Hit List
Yellow Paint
Aluminium Oxide
Hit List
Yellow Paint
Aluminium Oxide
Serving and Loading Queries
Name: Aluminium*
Search Search 2 2
Color: Yellow
or
Query 1
Search 1
Search 2
Search 3
Enter Query
Search Search 1 1
Flash Point < 21C
Hit List
Yellow Paint
Silver Paint
Hit List
Yellow Paint
and
Search Search 3 3



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-38
SAP AG 2006
D182
4711
Set of Hits
Saving and Loading Sets of Hits
Enter Search Criteria:
Search 1
Search 2
Search 3
Search 4
Search 5
D182
4711
Set of Hits
Set of Hits 1
Substance:
D182
4711
and so on ...
Save as
Enter Set of Hits:
Set of Hits 1



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-39
SAP AG 2006
1. .......................
2. .......................
3. .......................
4. .......................
5. .......................
Select Substances
List in SAP R/3
Excel Spreadsheets
Composition Tree
...
Displaying Properties for Substances



You can call different output methods from the hit list, and you can use integrated user exits to program
the output methods to suit your requirements.
Output methods supplied with the standard system include outputting the properties of the selected
substances in form of a list in SAP R/3 or as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, or displaying in the form of
a composition tree.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-40
SAP AG 2006
You should now be able to:
Store and manage specifications, such as substances
and their properties, in the specification database
Maintain relationships between substances and
materials in logistics
Search for specification data via the specification
information system
Specification Information System: Unit Summary



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-41
Exercises with Solutions



Unit 4: Specification Database Structure
Topic: Specification Basics



At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Create a specification
Create a specification template
Create a specification using a specification template


1-1 Exercise steps.
1-1-1 Create a specification to be used for copying information.
1-1-2 Create a specification template
1-1-3 Create a specification by copying the information from the specification template.
Note: Your instructor will explain what to enter where the ______ are seen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-42
1-2 From the Edit Specification: Hit List screen, choose Edit Templates and the Edit
Template screen will be displayed.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-43
1-2-1 Select the Template folder and choose Create Inheritance Templates . The
Create Inheritance Templates window will be displayed.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-44
1-2-2 Enter XXX_COPY (where XXX is your initials) in the Grp entry field, select the
Desc. folder, and the Description area will be displayed.


1-2-3 Enter EN in the L field, your initials and a description in the Object desc.( XXX-
RM Training Template), and choose Transfer . A confirmation window will be
displayed.


1-2-4 Choose the Yes button. Your template will be saved and the Edit Inheritance
Templates window will be redisplayed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-45
1-2-5 Expand the TEMPLATE folder by choosing TEMPLATE and the
templates will be displayed.


1-2-6 Select your template, choose Inheritance Templates Detail View , and the Edit
Inheritance Template ______ window will be displayed.


1-2-7 Choose All usages, All identifiers, and All value assignment types and choose Save
.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-46
1-2-8 Choose Transfer and the Edit Inheritance Templates window will be
redisplayed.
1-2-9 Choose Transfer and choose Yes in the dialog box. The Specification Hit List
will be redisplayed.

2-1 Create a specification and use a copy template to copy data.
2-1-1 Choose the Create and the Create Specification: Header screen will be
displayed.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-47
2-1-2 Enter your initials in the Specification field, REAL_SUB in the Specification Type
field, ALL in the Authorization group field, and choose Save .


2-1-3 Choose Copy Template and the Unsaved data window will be displayed.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-48
2-1-4 Choose the Yes button and the Edit Specification: Copy Template window will be
displayed.


2-1-5 Enter a source specification, SBST_APPLEC, in the Source specification field,
your template (from the previous exercise) in the Template field, and choose Back
.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-49
2-1-6 The Edit Specification: Header screen will be displayed.


2-1-7 Right-click and choose Property Tree.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-50
2-1-8 The Edit Specification: Property Tree screen will be displayed.


2-1-9 Select specification number and choose Expand Subtree . All properties will be
displayed.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 4-51
2-1-10 Those properties that have an icon next to them will contain data. To view this data,
double-click on the property line (for example, Carbohydrates (of Formula).


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-1
SAP AG 2006
WWI Reporting
and EH&S Tools



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-2
SAP AG 2006
At the end of this unit you will be able to:
Test the creation of reports
Explain how reports for different countries and in
different languages can be created from the same data
Select data for reports
Report Generation: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-3
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-5
SAP AG 2006
Your enterprise has prepared templates for
creating substance reports.
The templates have been tested and released.
Now, test reports in different languages and for
different countries must be created for the new
product to check the data entered in the
specification database.
Report Generation: Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-6
SAP AG 2006
ABC Corp.
AB 122345
Company
Customer Corp.
Main Street 321
Industry Town
EXTRATHION-S
Harmful
Gesundheits-
schdlich
Contains: Malathion
Enthlt: Malathion
E Flammable. Harmful
by inhalation and if
swallowed. Avoid
contact with skin and
eyes.
D Entzndlich. Gesund-
heitsschdlich beim
Einatmen und beim
Verschlucken.
Berhrung mit
der Haut und mit den
Augen vermeiden.
Report Generation: Objective
Target: Creation of documents,
for example, MSDS, labels, and
reports
Material Safety Data Sheet
According to EU directive 91/155/EEC
ABC Corp.
Product: EXTRATHION-S
Date: 08.05.2001
1. Identification of Substance / Preparation and
Company
Product: EXTRATHION-S
Company: ABC Corp.
Factoryville
AB 12345
2. Composition / Information on Ingredients
Chemical Nature
Pesticide, contains malathion
Insecticide concentrate, liquid
Hazard Symbol: Xn
R Phrases: R10, R20/22
S Phrases: S24/25
Dangerous Ingredients:
IUPAC Name CAS No. Hazard R Phrases Concen-
Symbol tration
Malathion 121-75-5 Xn R22 30 - 35 %
Toluol 108-88-3 F, Xn R11, R20 15 - 20 %
Cyclohexanon 108-94-1 Xn R10, R20 38 - 45 %



Various documents can be created by means of the data contained in the specification database, such as
material safety data sheets (MSDS), labels, and so on.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-7
SAP AG 2006
Report Generation: Performance Features
User-defined, customer-tailored
layout of forms
Creation of high-quality reports
Multilanguage capability
(translation management)
Fast, automated report creation



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-8
SAP AG 2006
W Windows indows
W Wordprocessor ordprocessor
I Integration ntegration
WWI
+ Functions
C functions
Word macros
WWI: Definition
Microsoft Word Microsoft Word



Windows Wordprocessor Integration provides the following additional features as compared to standard
Microsoft Winword :
The WWI menu bar contains new functions. These functions support you in creating symbols,
control flags, and special types of expansion in such a way that data from SAP R/3 is edited in the
desired way when generating reports.
There is a new icon bar containing tool buttons for WWI functions.
Some unnecessary options in the Winword standard menus are disabled. For example, you cannot
save your document to your PCs hard disk.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-9
SAP AG 2006
WWI: Performance Features
Various fonts and font sizes
Dynamic integration of graphic elements
Automatic character sizing
Automatic suppression of headings
Bar code support
Output of several country-language combinations on one
report (example: label)
One layout for all character sets, for example, English,
Greek, or Russian
User-friendly layout design using additional functions
Easy-to-read layout by hiding control information
Interactive use of SAP R/3
(F4 help to find symbols, syntax checks)



The standard word processing software Microsoft Winword offers many formatting options, such as
various fonts and font sizes. To create a complex report such as a material safety data sheet or a label,
however, you need additional functions, which are provided by WWI.
The dynamic integration of graphic elements allows you to, for example, output hazard symbols as
graphic symbols in various sizes.
Automatic character sizing allows optimum use of the available space, for example, a predefined frame.
Headings of fields that are not filled in the substance database can be suppressed.
The system can convert symbols according to customer requirements and print them as bar codes.
For labels, it is important that a number of country-language combinations can be output.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-10
SAP AG 2006
Report Template: How It Works
SAP R/3
Specification Data
Phrases
Logistics Data
Symbols
Symbols are used as placeholders
for SAP R/3 database fields.
A template is created using
symbols to position and format
the data.
Fields come from the specification
database or other SAP R/3
components.
The symbols are expanded when
the report template is assigned a
report generation variant (filter)
and a specification target.
The report template defines the layout of a document.
Different symbols form the links to data in SAP R/3.
All symbols are present in a document template in unexpanded form.



Symbols are placeholders for fields in the SAP R/3 database. These can be fields from the EH&S
specification database or from other SAP R/3 components.
By means of these symbols, you assign fields to specific positions in your report template.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-11
SAP AG 2006
<01GESTRIDENT(I:NAM,ET,)>
<02EHS_MATNAM>
<01G1015003AD(P;*)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(EHSXP-H03.00000010)>
Symbol type
Symbol
Other data
<01G1013005VA> e.g., % total solids value
e.g., nutrient composition
e.g., identifier label name
e.g., material name from MM
e.g., title 3. Allergens
Report Template: Symbols



Symbols are grouped into three symbol types:
Key
01 Symbol
Placeholder for values of numerical characteristics, phrase-related characteristics, and table fields of the
EH&S specification database
02 Parameter
Placeholder for values of table fields from other SAP R/3 components
03 Phrase/Description
Placeholders for phrase text from EH&S phrase management as far as not used for value
assignment to characteristics
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-12
SAP AG 2006
Report Template: Use of Symbols Results
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB1)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB-8-1)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB4)> <02LIPSARKTX>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB3)> 08.05.2001
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB6)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB4)> <02LIPSARKTX>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB7)> <03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB-8-1)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB-8-2)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB-8-3)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB12)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB13)>
<01ESTRIIDENT(I:NAM,TRIV,)>
<01ESTRIIDENT(I:NAM,CC,)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB-02-06)><11BRG002(M,LABELLING;*)>
<01LABELLS(C;*)><11ERG002>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB-02-07)> <11BRG002(M,LABELLING;*)>
<01LABELLRP(C;*)><11ERG002>
<03EHS_L_TEXT(CED-SDB-02-03)>
<12BSG002(M,DANGEROUS_INGRED;*)>
<03EHS_L_TEXT <03EHS_L_TEXT < 03EHS_L_TEXT <03EHS_L_TEXT
(CED-SDB- (CED-SDB--02-04)> (CED-SDB--02-06)> (CED-SDB--02-07)>
01.002)>
<11BRG009(S:PO <11BRG009(S:PO <11BRG009(S:PO <11BRG009(S:PO
S;*)> S;*)> S;*)> S;*)>
<01ESTRIIDENT <01ESTRIIDENT <01ESTRIIDENT <01ESTRIIDENT
(I:NAM,IUPAC,;* I:NUM,CAS,;*)> <11ERG009> *)><11ERG009>
)><11ERG009> 11ERG009>
Material Safety Data Sheet
According to EU Directive 91/155/EEC
ABC Corp.
Product: EXTRATHION-S
Date: 08.05.2001
1. Identification of Substance / Preparation and
Company
Product: EXTRATHION-S
Company: ABC Corp.
Factoryville
AB 12345
2. Composition / Information on Ingredients
Chemical Nature
Pesticide, contains malathion
insecticide concentrate, liquid
Hazard Symbol: Xn
R Phrases: R10, R20/22
Dangerous Ingredients:
IUPAC Name CAS No. Hazard R Phrases
Symbol
Malathion 121-75-5 Xn R22
Toluol 108-88-3 F,Xn R11, R20
Cyclohexanone 108-94-1 Xn R10, R20



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-13
SAP AG 2006
WWI
WWI: Generating Reports
Value
Selection
SAP R/3
Symbols
Specification Data
Phrases
Logistics Data
Symbol List
Document Management
Report Template
Report
Report
Test report
.rtf file
Report body or
final report
FILTER:
RGV,
Language,
Key Date
FILTER: FILTER:
RGV, RGV,
Language, Language,
Key Date Key Date



In conjunction with the report generation variant (RGV), the report is generated directly for a substance
and a key date in a specific language. The generation is performed by the WWI generation server. The
symbols are then expanded, which means they are replaced by data from the EH&S specification
database, phrases, or from other SAP R/3 components.
Values are selected using a symbol list containing all symbols in the template, and by the RGV, the
language, and the key date.
Test reports are dropped again after having been created and are not stored in SAP R/3.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-14
SAP AG 2006
WWI: Generation Methods
WWI server Front end
WWI Monitor:
List of all jobs
List of servers
Generation job status
Local/Synchronous (test report)
Central/Asynchronous
WWI server (report)



Test reports are generated locally on your own front-end PC.
Reports are generated centrally on the WWI server. This WWI server is a fast PC that is set up for WWI
generation.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-15
SAP AG 2006
Specification
Specification
+ Print date
Report
template
Phrase
(description)
Symbols
Parameters
Report Body
Density:
0,8 g/cm
3
Parameter
Final Report
Density:
0,8 g/cm3
Emulsion
De Luxe Gold
Material name
Customer data
Customer
Reports: Report Generation Process
RGV
Language
Key date
RGV
Language
Key date
EH&S
Release
Release
Report information
system
MM
SD



There are three steps in report generation:
A report template must be created.
A report body is created and can be found in the report information system.
To generate a report body, a report template and a report generation variant must be selected. With
the generation on the WWI server, all symbols of the symbol types Symbol and Phrase are
expanded. The resulting report body is transferred to the EH&S system and is subject to release.
A final report is created. It can be found under the shipping orders.
To generate the final report, a released, versioned report body must be selected for a certain report
generation variant. With generation on the WWI server, all symbols of the symbol type Parameter
are replaced by data. This process creates the final report, which is returned to the EH&S system.
The final report can now be sent to the customer. This second generation step is part of the report
shipping process.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-16
SAP AG 2006
Summary of Selection Criteria and Control Flags
Key, language-dependent description
Report type
Report Template (BV) + Version
Rating(s)
Status checks
Validity area and usage check
Validity area-language-combinations
(for example, for labels)
Date format
Decimal notation
Control information for report management
Reports: Report Generation Variant (RGV)



The report generation variant links the report template with a leading validity area and one or more
specification value assignment ratings, which are used to select values for the report.
Control information for report management:
Automatic generation of manual report requests
Change marks
Initial release status
Versioning obligation
Automatically set to historical
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-17
SAP AG 2006
Report Creation: Summary
Generate and Create Symbols (EH&S and Customizing) Generate Generate and and Create Create Symbols (EH&S and Symbols (EH&S and Customizing Customizing) )
Create Report Template (EH&S) Create Create Report Report Template Template (EH&S) (EH&S)
Maintain Report Template (WWI) Maintain Maintain Report Report Template Template (WWI) (WWI)
Save Report Template Save Report Save Report Template Template
Create Report Generation Variant Create Create Report Generation Report Generation Variant Variant
Generate Release and Version Report Body Generate Generate Release and Version Report Body Release and Version Report Body
Generate Final Report Generate Generate Final Report Final Report



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-18
SAP AG 2006
You should now be able to:
Tested the creation of reports
Explain how reports for different countries and in different
languages can be created from the same data
Select data for reports
Report Generation: Unit Summary



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-19
Exercises with Solutions



Unit 5A: WWI Reporting and EH&S Tools
Topic: Report Information System



At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
View a WWI report from a specification

1-1 Exercise steps.
1-1-1 Select specification.
1-1-2 Select report generation variant.
1-1-3 View report.

2-1 Select different specifications and report variants.
Note: Your instructor will explain what to enter where the ______ are seen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-20
3-1 Search for _____ specification.
3-1-1 Start transaction CG02 (Substance Workbench) and the Edit Specification: Initial
Screen will be displayed. Double-click on Substance on left side of the screen.


3-1-2 Enter apple cin* in the Name Identifier field and choose Hit List . The Edit
Specification: Hit List screen will be displayed.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 5-21
3-1-3 Select specification by double-clicking . Choose Specification
Reports Report from Template. The Create Report Using Template window will
be displayed.




3-1-4 Enter NUTLABEL01 in the Generation variant field and choose Display . The
system will start Microsoft Word. It will generate the food label based on the
current data within the selected specification.
3-1-5 Close the Word document and Exit out of the Create Report Using Template
dialog box. Return to the Edit Specification: Initial Screen by choosing Back .
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe
Management
Workbench



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-2
SAP AG 2006
Recipe definition
Recipe types and recipe hierarchy
Recipe structure and ISA S88
Recipe Management Workbench benefits
Recipe Management Workbench navigation
Recipe Management Workbench personalization
Recipe search and hit list
Contents:
Recipe Management Workbench



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-3
SAP AG 2006
State the benefits of the Recipe Management Workbench
Use the Recipe Management Workbench
Define a recipe structure
Explain Recipe Management Workbench navigation and
personalization
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Recipe Management Workbench: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management Recipe Management
Workbench Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-6
SAP AG 2006
Your company is in a Process industry, including
consumer products (food and non-food), chemicals,
and pharmaceuticals. You and interested in
improving your new product development and
commercialization process.
Recipe Management Workbench: Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-7
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management
Recipe definition
What is it about?
Benefits
Workbench
Recipe structure
Recipe types
Workbench personalization
Recipe search
Creating a recipe
Contents



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-8
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Definition
A recipe is a description of the requirements that must be met
in a specific manufacturing process.
A recipe comprises the material, substance, process, and
resource data of a manufacturing process.
Depending on the application area, the type of data ranges
from a general description of the requirements to concrete
procedural instructions for a specific production plant.
Recipes are always independent of the dates of an order and
contain no equipment control functions.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-9
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management: What is it About ?
Recipe Management is designed to:
Support the development process of a recipe or product
Start with high-level information and extend it to detailed specification
and process definitions
Manage controlled development of recipes over different levels
Support integrated communication between different departments
Target customers:
Process industry - consumer products (food and non-food),
chemicals, and pharmaceuticals
Target users:
Users who define new products and maintain existing products
Users at local or production sites who generate local, executable
recipes based on centrally managed products



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-10
SAP AG 2006
Output/Product
Applecin
Input/Ingredient
Whole Grain Oat
Spec-20-5470 91 %
Apple Flavor
Spec-20-2125 0.001%
Salt
Spec-20-1861 0.01 %
Pouch, Foil

Process
Measure or weigh ingredients
and add to make-up tank
Add rework to make-up tank
Blend ingredients
Pass ingredient through metal
detector
Transfer to use tank and
maintain temperature under
constant agitation
Equipment Requirements
Make-up tank with 10 liter
capacity; heat up to 100C
F
o
r
m
u
l
a
Ingredient/
Inputs
Product/
Outputs
Process
Instructions
Equipment
Requirements
F
o
r
m
u
l
a
Recipe
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
Header Data
Header Data
Recipe Management: Recipe Structure



A recipe is made up of the following elements:
The recipe header includes information about change statuses, their validity, statuses, and reference
language, as well as the objects linked to the recipe (such as projects)
A list of all products manufactured in the process, along with the components and quantities required
A description of the process, including the process steps and their parameters
A list of the plant equipment and resources required for the individual process steps
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-11
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Types: ISA S88 Compliance
General Recipe
General Recipe
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Master Recipe
Master Recipe
Master Recipe
Master Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Control Recipe
Specification of material
and process
Enterprise level
Area-specific specification
Site level
Definition of material and
process
Plant level
Production execution
Batch and equipment level
RM



Depending on the application and enterprise area, the type of information required ranges from a general
description of the requirements to concrete procedural instructions for a specific production plant.
When creating a recipe, you therefore assign every recipe to a recipe type defined in Customizing. In
this way, you determine the recipe structure and attributes. You specify, for example:
Which objects may be linked to a recipe, for example, higher- or lower-level recipes, a formula or
production version, and an independent or recipe-dependent formula
Whether status management is active in a recipe and which status profile is used
Whether you can or must use change master records in recipe editing
Which tab pages (views) are active in a recipe
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-12
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Development on Different Levels
General Recipe
General Recipe
Enterprise definition
(Formula, process, equipment)
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Usage variation
(Country-specific for legal compliance)
Master Recipe
Master Recipe
Plant-specific variations
(Based on particular equipment)
BOM generation
Process operations
Equipment selection
Process parameters



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-13
SAP AG 2006
Application Area Toolbar
Navigation Area
Detail Area
Recipe Management Workbench
Menu



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-14
SAP AG 2006
Benefits of the Recipe Management Workbench
Integrated Development Workbench
Recipes, specifications, formulas, materials, and stages
Building blocks and process templates
Ease of use, for example, navigation within the property tree
Cost and Nutritional Calculation
Estimated material costs
Losses and gains; energy
Standardization
Complete Recipe Development
Multi-step recipes (general, site, and master recipes)
Structured process step and parameter descriptions
Structured equipment requirements
In-process control and definitions



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-15
SAP AG 2006
Workbench Navigation Area
Navigation area:
- Recipes
- Building block approach
- Formulas
- Materials and substances
Navigation area:
- Recipes
- Building block approach
- Formulas
- Materials and substances
Detailed structure
Detailed structure



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-16
SAP AG 2006
Workbench Application Area (2)
Application Area with tabs:
- Basic Data
- Eng. Change Statuses
- Scope of Application
- Classification
- Formula
- Process
- Equipment Requirements
- Process Parameters
- Hierarchy
- Replacement
- Identifiers
- Documents
- Translation Status
- Administration Data
- Configuration
Application Area with tabs:
- Basic Data
- Eng. Change Statuses
- Scope of Application
- Classification
- Formula
- Process
- Equipment Requirements
- Process Parameters
- Hierarchy
- Replacement
- Identifiers
- Documents
- Translation Status
- Administration Data
- Configuration



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-17
SAP AG 2006
Personalizing the Workbench
Select your settings
Select your settings
Quick info Personalization
Quick info Personalization



You can save your own Workbench preferences. The system saves the following Workbench settings
for each user:
General
Columns
Structures
Window Arrangement
Sort Columns
Sort Objects
Layout of tree columns
Favorites
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-18
SAP AG 2006
Personalizing the Workbench (2)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-19
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Search: Hit List
Results Hit List
Results Hit List
Search Criteria
Search Criteria



The Basic Data tab pages screen contains overall data that is valid for the whole recipe. The data
includes:
Name of the recipe and the translated names
The reference language of the recipe
The authorization group allowed to see or work with the recipe
The Confidental indicator
The validity time period
The overall reference quantity
The lot size range for production
The overall recipe system status
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-20
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management Workbench: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
State the benefits of the Recipe Management Workbench
Use the Recipe Management Workbench
Define a recipe structure
Explain Recipe Management Workbench navigation and
personalization



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-21
Exercises


Unit: Recipe Management Workbench
Topic: Recipe Maintenance and Workbench
Navigation


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Make Workbench personalization settings
Create a recipe without version
Create a recipe with version
Change and display recipes
Load recipes
Search for recipes


Workbench Features
The following table displays the functions in the toolbar:
Symbol Function Description
Previous Object Goes to the last node you opened (the
current node is added to the history)

Nodes Opened Goes to a specific node you opened earlier
Next Object Goes to the next object in the object
history

Nodes you exited by choosing
Back
Lists the nodes you opened
Expand Expands the subtree fully
Collapse Collapses the subtree fully
Find in Tree Finds text
Find Next Entry Finds the next entry, starting from the
current node
Filter Sets a filter at the current node

Name of Building Block Restricts view to a building block
Personalize Saves the current layout settings

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-22
Apart from the Expand Subtree and Collapse Subtree functions, you can use a search function in
the tree. If the tree is collapsed, the search function expands the node that matches the current
search string and selects it.
The toolbar also contains a selection list that allows you to navigate directly to building blocks.
Using filter functions, you can restrict the current view to a particular node and its subtree. You
can use these filter functions more than once.
Each node you open is logged in a history. You can scroll backward and forward through the
nodes you have opened, or choose one directly from the selection list under the forward and
backward arrows. This list shows the node name as well as the name of the building block.

1-1 Make Workbench personalization settings.
1-1-1 Start transaction RMWB to bring up the Recipe Management Workbench initial
screen. Enter your own personal settings:
Select Remember Column Settings.
Select Remember Structure Layouts.
Set Mode to Edit.

2-1 Create your own recipe.
2-1-1 Use recipe type General Recipe and a key of Recipe01_##.
2-1-2 Enter the basic data of the recipe as described below:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Description Apple Cookie ##
Valid from today
Valid to 12/31/2010
Reference Qty 100
Lot Size From 20
Lot Size to 100

3-1 Create your own recipe version.
3-1-1 Use the recipe you just created (Recipe01_##) as the source. Select General Recipe
with versioning.

4-1 Changing or displaying recipes.
4-1-1 Select your recipe from step 2.
4-1-2 Choose the tab page where you want to change the data and make your changes.
4-1-3 Save your changes.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-23
5-1 Searching for recipes manually in the recipe information system.
5-1-1 Search for recipes with different criteria.
5-1-2 Try using different validity dates.
5-1-3 Enter search criteria for the extended search functions if required.
5-1-4 Remove individual recipes from the hit list.
5-1-5 Create a where-used list for one or more recipes in the hit list.
5-1-6 Perform another search step from the hit list by using the Extend Selection, Refine
Selection, and Reduce Selection options.

6-1 Loading recipes.
6-1-1 Use the functions of the recipe information system to search for the recipes with the
word apple in the number as *apple*.
6-1-2 Select the recipe GR_APPLE_CK in the hit list.
6-1-3 Move the selected recipe to the Recipe folder in the navigation area using drag and
drop.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-24
Solutions


Unit: Recipe Management Workbench
Topic: Recipe Maintenance and Workbench
Navigation

Workbench Features
The following table displays the functions in the toolbar:
Symbol Function Description
Previous object Goes to the last node you opened (the
current node is added to the history)

Nodes Opened Goes to a specific node you opened earlier
Next Object Goes to the next object in the object
history

Nodes you exited by choosing
Back
Lists the nodes you opened
Expand Expands the subtree fully
Collapse Collapses the subtree fully
Find in Tree Finds text
Find Next Entry Finds the next entry, starting from the
current node
Filter Sets a filter at the current node

Name of Building Block Restricts view to a building block
Personalize Saves the current layout settings

Apart from the Expand Subtree and Collapse Subtree functions, you can use a search function in
the tree. If the tree is collapsed, the search function expands the node that matches the current
search string and selects it.
The toolbar also contains a selection list that allows you to navigate directly to building blocks.
Using filter functions, you can restrict the current view to a particular node and its subtree. You
can use these filter functions more than once.
Each node you open is logged in a history. You can scroll backward and forward through the
nodes you have opened, or choose one directly from the selection list under the forward and
backward arrows. This list shows the node name as well as the name of the building block.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-25
1-1 Make Workbench personalization settings.
1-1-1 Start transaction RMWB to bring up the Recipe Management Workbench initial
screen. If this is the first use, a dialog screen will appear to enter personalization. If
not, choose Personalization .
Make optional user settings and set the Mode to Edit. Confirm your entries by
choosing the icon.


2-1 Create your own recipe.
Note: If you are performing exercises in a workshop or training class, please define object
keys with your initials last. This group identifier is always symbolized by ##.
...
Choose Recipe in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it. The initial screen of the
recipe information system is then displayed.

Choose Create .
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-26
2-1-1 In the Target section, choose the recipe type General Recipe. The recipe key is
assigned manually: Recipe01_##.

Confirm your entries by choosing Continue/Enter .
The Basic Data tab page is then displayed.
2-1-2 Enter the basic data of the recipe and save it.
Field Name or Data Type Value
Description Apple Cookie ##
Valid from today
Valid to 12/31/2010
Reference Qty 100
Lot Size From 20
Lot Size to 100

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-27
Choose Save .


Exit out of the recipe by choosing Exit .

3-1 Create your own recipe version.
3-1-1 Choose Recipe in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it.
The initial screen of the recipe information system is then displayed.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-28
Choose Create .
Using the recipe you just created as a template, enter the name Recipe01_## in the
open cell on the right side of the Source block.
Under Target, choose the recipe type General Recipe with Versions (all else can be
left blank).

Confirm your entries by choosing the icon.
The Basic Data tab page is then displayed. The recipe has automatically been
assigned a version number that is added to the key (for example, NAME.001 for
the first version).

Save your entries by choosing Save .

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-29
4-1 Changing or displaying recipes.
4-1-1 Choose Recipe in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it. The initial screen
of the recipe information system is then displayed.


Load the recipe Recipe01_## into the navigation area. Highlight the recipe in the
navigation tree and double-click to load.


If you are in display mode, choose Display Change to switch to change
mode.
4-1-2 Choose the tab page where you want to change the data and make your changes.
4-1-3 Save your entries by choosing Save .

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-30
5-1 Searching for recipes manually in recipe information system.
5-1-1 Choose Recipe in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it. The Recipe
Information System initial screen is then displayed.
If you have already performed a search in this session, you will automatically get a
hit list with the last selection criteria.
Choose Back (F3) to get back to the selection screen.
5-1-2 Enter the search criteria.

Note the following:
The selection criteria you used in your last search are displayed as default
values. Choose Search Criteria to delete these values if necessary.
By entering a change number or key date or search period under Validity, you specify the search
criteria to be met. If you enter a search period (date range), the search criteria will be met by
any day within this period. Recipes are always displayed on the key date or for a change
number.
5-1-3 Enter search criteria for the extended search functions if required. To do so, choose
Enter Parameters next to the extended search function text.
Note the following:
The criteria you enter on the initial screen and for the enhanced search
functions are linked by AND, which means that the system only selects those
formulas that meet all the criteria.
5-1-4 Choose Hit List .
The recipes found by the system are displayed in a list.
5-1-5 If required, continue editing as follows:
Remove individual recipes from the hit list.
To do so, select the recipes (by clicking, or selecting a block via CTRL
or SHIFT, then click) and choose Utilities Selection Manual Reduction
(deletes highlighted entries from hit list).
Create a where-used list for one or more recipes in the hit list.
Select the recipes and choose Where-Used List .

Perform another search step from the hit list.
To do so, choose one of the following functions:
Extend Selection
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 6-31
Refine Selection
Reduce Selection

6-1 Loading recipes.
6-1-1 Choose Recipe in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it. The Recipe
Information System initial screen is then displayed.


Use the functions of the recipe information system to search for the recipes with
the word apple in the number as *apple*.
6-1-2 Select the recipe GR_APPLE_CK in the hit list.


6-1-3 Move the selected recipe to the Recipe folder in the navigation area using drag
and drop.
In the Navigation area, you can also move frequently required recipes and other
objects to the Favorites folder using drag and drop.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Header
Information



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-2
SAP AG 2006
Basic data
Scope of application
Classifying recipes
Identifiers
Document links
Translation
Hierarchy
Process model
Equipment requirements
Contents:
Recipe Header Information



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-3
SAP AG 2006
Explain the purpose of recipe header information
Explain what each tab on the recipe header represents
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Recipe Header Information: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header Recipe Header
Information Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-6
SAP AG 2006
Your company is in a process industry, including
consumer products (food and non-food), chemicals,
and pharmaceuticals. You are interested in
improving your new product development and
commercialization processes.
Recipe Header Information: Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-7
SAP AG 2006
Basic Data
Reference language
Reference language
Translation tool
Translation tool
Confidential indicator
Confidential indicator
Status management
Status management
The authorization group determines whether a user has permission to
create, change, or display the given recipe. This information is stored in the
master data and designates ownership.
Recipe Consistency
Check
Recipe Consistency
Check
Validity Period
Validity Period
Reference Quantity
Reference Quantity
Responsible Person/group
Responsible Person/group
Project Systems link
Project Systems link
Authorization Group
Authorization Group
Preferred Recipe
Preferred Recipe



The Basic Data tab pages screen contains overall data that is valid for the whole recipe. The data
includes:
Name of the recipe and the translated names
The recipes reference language
The authorization group allowed to see or work with the recipe
The Confidential indicator
The validity time period
The overall reference quantity
The lot size range for production
The overall recipe system status
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-8
SAP AG 2006
Header Status
Recipe Header Status
Indicates maintenance status of recipe, not approval for use
Shows whether the recipe is in the process of being maintained, locked
and ready for approval, temporarily not active, or obsolete
Provides record locking to prevent changes while being approved or
after release
Use (set) the change number when making changes in the Workbench



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-9
SAP AG 2006
Scope of Application
Detailed definition of scope of application
Detailed definition of scope of application
Recipe status
Recipe status
Validity area
Validity area
Rating
Rating
Status Network: What am I allowed to do with this recipe?
Where and when is it valid?
? Prohibitions by status: Setting, displaying, deleting
? Linked to authorization/security concept
? Usage (where consumed) is designated per release
? Date effectivity per release (ECM optional)
Status Network: What am I allowed to do with this recipe?
Where and when is it valid?
? Prohibitions by status: Setting, displaying, deleting
? Linked to authorization/security concept
? Usage (where consumed) is designated per release
? Date effectivity per release (ECM optional)



You use the scope of application to restrict the usage of change statuses for a recipe to certain regional
or organizational units. You enter a separate validity period along with a status for each scope of
application entry. You need to do so, for example:
If you want to release a change status for a restricted usage only
If you want to release a change status for different usages with different validity periods

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-10
SAP AG 2006
Rejected
User Status Profile Released
Status Management for Scope of Application
Status Network for the Scope of Application for Recipes
Processing Closed
Recipe use
Option to use ECM or versioning
Scope of Application Status Release for Usage (Rating + Validity Area)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-11
SAP AG 2006
Classifying Recipes
Classification: Grouping recipes according to company criteria
By assigning similar recipes to the same class and assigning
recipe-specific values to the characteristics, you can search for
recipes according useful attributes.
Classification: Grouping recipes according to company criteria
By assigning similar recipes to the same class and assigning
recipe-specific values to the characteristics, you can search for
recipes according useful attributes.
Class
Class



You group recipes according to your own criteria by assigning similar recipes to the same class and
assigning recipe-specific values to the class characteristics. When you enter recipe editing, you can then
search for and load the recipes according to the classes and their characteristics.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-12
SAP AG 2006
Identifiers
Identifier: An element that names or categorizes a recipe
Label name
Product description
Legacy system alias
Business unit or brand
Product category
Identifier: An element that names or categorizes a recipe
Label name
Product description
Legacy system alias
Business unit or brand
Product category



Depending on the requirements of your enterprise or your processes, you may need additional
information to describe your formulas and recipes, such as explanations in the form of texts or different
descriptions.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-13
SAP AG 2006
Document Management Links
Link to Document Management System
Link to Document Management System
Document link: Additional information and explanations
supplementing standard recipe data, for example, standard
operating procedures (SOPs) or plant graphics
Documents may be linked to one or many recipes
Uses document management system document info recores
(DIRs)
All formats supported, for example, as texts, graphics, or
video sequences
Document link: Additional information and explanations
supplementing standard recipe data, for example, standard
operating procedures (SOPs) or plant graphics
Documents may be linked to one or many recipes
Uses document management system document info recores
(DIRs)
All formats supported, for example, as texts, graphics, or
video sequences



Depending on the process and your enterprise, you may want to add additional information and
explanations to the recipe data defined in the standard system by adding, for example, a mnemonic
description, standard operating procedures (SOPs), or a plant graphic. This information may be relevant
to one or more recipes. It may be available in completely different formats, for example, as texts,
graphics, or video sequences.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-14
SAP AG 2006
Translation
Translate short texts
Translate short texts
Translate long texts
Translate long texts
Manage and Record Recipe Language Translations
Translate Name (Short Description)
Translate Header Long Text
Manage Translation Status Release by Language



You can use the Translation function to translate short texts (descriptions, creation reasons, and
comments) and existing long texts, and make them available to all users.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-15
SAP AG 2006
Hierarchy
Site recipes at a lower level
Site recipes at a lower level
Map relationships between related recipes types in Recipe Management:
Parent-Child (derived from) relationship
General Site Master Recipes Production Version
Hierarchical relationships between recipes are valid for all recipe
change statuses



Recipes are used at different levels within an enterprise, and each application area has different
requirements with regards to the recipe structure, data, and properties. For this reason, recipes of
different recipe types which may be derived from each other are needed for the same manufacturing
process.
You can use recipe hierarchies to visually reproduce relationships between related recipes in Recipe
Management. In this way you assign, for example, the site recipes derived from a general recipe to this
recipe, and the master recipes created from a site recipe to this site recipe.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-16
SAP AG 2006
Process Model
Process
Process Stage
Process Operation
Process Action
1
1...N
1
1...N
1
1...N



The process is the top element in the model. There is only one process in a recipe and it can be divided
into several stages, which, in turn, can be divided into different operations. Actions are located at the
lowest level in the hierarchy and are combined to form a process operation.
The bottom process elements in the hierarchy are always dependent on the top process elements. In this
model, there is a 1 to 1N relationship between the individual levels.
The process model describes the process part of the general and site recipe. Rather than referring to the
equipment, the process corresponds to a procedure that is linked to it.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-17
SAP AG 2006
Equipment Requirements
Equipment requirements on each process level
Equipment requirements on each process level
Equipment requirements with characteristics
Equipment requirements with characteristics



Use this function to map the equipment requirements data in a recipe.
Each recipe contains equipment data (for example, boiler, mixer, furnace) with certain requirements
(size, speed, and so on). You can assign equipment requirements at the recipe, process, process stage,
process operation, and process action levels.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-18
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Header Information: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Explain the purpose of recipe header
information
Explain what each tab on the recipe header
represents



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-19
Exercises


Unit: Recipe Management
Topic: Header Information

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Edit scope of application
Classify recipes
Maintain identifiers
Create and edit document links
Translate texts
Create and explain recipe hierarchies

1-1 Edit scope of application
1-1-1 Edit the scope of application of your recipe and use a Rating of Customer, Validity
Area of US, and a validity period valid from todays date.

2-1 Classify recipes
2-1-1 Create a classification using the following data:
Class: PD_REQUIREMENTS
Importance of the Requirement: Important
Frequency of the Requirements: often
Source of the Requirement: Leave blank
Substitution Req. possible?: Not possible to substitute
Rough cost estimation: Leave blank
Note: Steps 4 to 7 can be repeated to define further classifications.

3-1 Identifiers
3-1-1 Add an identifier to your recipe of the type NAM-PROD with a text of ## Apple
Cookie, New Flavor.

4-1 Create and edit document links
4-1-1 Link a document to your recipe using the following:
Document Type: RMS
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-20
Document Name: APPLE CINNAMON DESCRP.

5-1 Translate short text
5-1-1 Enter translations for your short text by entering the German description of
Apfelplatzchen.
5-1-2 Release your translation.

6-1 Recipe hierarchy
6-1-1 Create a new recipe with the key Recipe02_## and a recipe type of Site Recipe.
6-1-2 Add the following information into the Basic Data tab and save your data.
Name: Apple Cookie ## US
Valid from: current date
Valid to: 12/31//2010
Reference Qty: 100
Lot Size From: 20 to 100
6-1-3 Find your first recipe, Recipe01_##, and add it to your new recipe, Recipe02_##, as
a lower-level recipe in the Hierarchy tab.

You have created a hierarchy between a general and a site recipe. If you would
generate a production version BOM or a PP-PI master recipe, you would see
these recipes in the lower part of the detail screen.
If you copy a site recipe from a general recipe, the system will ask if you want
to create a hierarchy automatically.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-21
Solutions


Unit: Recipe Management
Topic: Header Information

1-1 Edit scope of application
1-1-1 Edit the scope of application of your recipe and use a Rating of Customer, Validity
Area of US, and a validity period valid from todays date.
LoadRecipe01_## to assign scope of application entries and choose the Scope of
Application tab page.
Enter its usage (rating and validity area).
Rating: Customer
Validity Area Category: REGION
Validity Area: US
Enter the validity period for the scope of application entry, valid from todays date.


Confirm your entries by choosing ENTER.
The Status field input help provides a list of the next statuses allowed according to
the status network.
Choose Save .

2-1 Classify recipes
2-1-1 Create a classification using the following data:
Class: PD_REQUIREMENTS
Importance of the Requirement: Important
Frequency of the Requirements: often
Source of the Requirement: Leave blank
Substitution Req. possible?: Not possible to substitute
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-22
Rough cost estimation: Leave blank
Remain in or find and load Recipe01_##.
If needed, choose Expand Recipe in the Recipe Workbench and double-click on
your recipe to make sure you are at the recipe header level.
Choose the Classification tab page.


Choose Append Row or Insert Row to create active fields.
Enter a class in the first column.
Class: PD_REQUIREMENTS
Confirm your entry by choosing ENTER.


In the Value Assignment area (lower portion of the screen), enter the characteristics
in this class with the recipe-specific values.


Save your data by choosing Save .
Note: Steps 4 to 7 can be repeated to define further classifications.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-23
3-1 Identifiers
3-1-1 Add an identifier to your recipe of the type NAM-PROD with a text of ## Apple
Cookie, New Flavor.
Select the Identifiers tab page for the recipe ###_Recipe01.
Enter the following information:
ID categ.: NAM
ID type: PROD
Identifier: ## Apple Cookie, New Flavor


Save your data by choosing Save .

4-1 Create and edit document links
4-1-1 Link a document to your recipe using the following:
Document Type: RMS
Document Name: APPLE CINNAMON DESCRP.
Select the Documents tab page for the recipe Recipe01##.
Choose Append Row or Insert Row to create active fields.
Enter the document type RMS and the document name APPLE CINNAMON
DESCRIP.
Confirm your entries using the ENTER key.


Display the document file by highlighting the entry you just made and selecting the
Display Originals icon.
The document file is displayed in Microsoft Word.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-24


Close the Word file and, when back in the Recipe Workbench, choose Save.

5-1 Translate short text
5-1-1 Enter translations for your short text by entering the German description of
Apfelplatzchen.
Remain in the header level of recipe ###_Recipe01.
In the upper portion of the screen, select Translate Description . This icon is
next to the text field on in the toolbar.


Position your cursor on an empty row in the table, and choose the target language.
Target language: DE
Translate the description and confirm your entry by choosing ENTER.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-25
5-1-2 Release your translation.
To release translated text, choose the Translation Status tab page. Use the
language drop-down list to select German. Set the Release flag for the entry. By
doing so, you confirm that the translation is complete.


Save your data .

6-1 Recipe hierarchy
6-1-1 Create a new recipe with the key Recipe02_## and a recipe type of Site Recipe.
Choose Recipe in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it. The initial
screen of the recipe information system is then displayed. Choose Create .
Create new recipe:
Recipe: Recipe02_##
Recipe Type: Site recipe


6-1-2 Add the following information into the Basic Data tab and save your data.
Name: Apple Cookie ## US
Valid from: current date
Valid to: 12/31//2010
Reference Qty: 100
Lot Size From: 20 to 100
6-1-3 Find your first recipe, Recipe01_##, and add to your new recipe, Recipe02_##, as a
lower-level recipe in the Hierarchy tab.
Choose Recipe in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it. The initial screen
of the recipe information system is then displayed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 7-26
Find and load Recipe01_##.
Choose the Hierarchy tab page.
Choose Create or Insert Row to create active fields.
Enter the recipe: Recipe02_##.

Confirm your entries by pressing ENTER.
Save your entries by choosing Save .

You have created a hierarchy between a general and a site recipe. If you
would generate a production version BOM or a PP-PI master recipe, you would see
these recipes in the lower part of the detail screen.
If you copy a site recipe from a general recipe, the system will ask if you want to
create a hierarchy automatically.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Process and
Process Elements



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-2
SAP AG 2006
Processes and process elements
Stage as process element
Operation as process element
Action as process element
Equipment requirements
Process parameters
In-process quality inspection
Contents:
Recipe Process and Process Elements



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-3
SAP AG 2006
Create process and process elements: Stage, operation,
and action
Define process-related equipment requirements
Define process parameters
Define in-process control inspection characteristics
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Recipe Process and Process Elements: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and Recipe Process and
Process Elements Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-6
SAP AG 2006
Your company is in a process industry, including
consumer products (food and non-food), chemicals,
and pharmaceuticals. You are interested in
improving your new product development and
commercialization processes.
Recipe Process and Process Elements: Business
Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-7
SAP AG 2006
The Recipe Management Workbench
Application Area Toolbar
Navigation Area
Detail Area
Menu



The Recipe Management Workbench gives you access to all objects used in Recipe Management,
including:
Specifications (substances)
Materials
Recipes
Formulas
The Navigation area displays all objects sorted by object type. You can perform maintenance functions
by dragging and dropping marked objects with your mouse.
The Detail area displays the drilled-down detail structure of an object, for example, the property tree of
a specification.
The Application area shows the application screen for displaying or maintaining the application data.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-8
SAP AG 2006
Output/Product
Applecin
Input/Ingredient
Whole Grain Oat
Spec-20-5470 91 %
Apple Flavor
Spec-20-2125 0.001%
Salt
Spec-20-1861 0.01 %
Pouch, Foil

Process
Measure or weigh ingredients
and add to make-up tank
Add rework to make-up tank
Blend ingredients
Pass ingredient through metal
detector
Transfer to use tank and
maintain temperature under
constant agitation
Equipment Requirements
Make-up tank with 10 liter
capacity; heat up to 100C
F
o
r
m
u
l
a
Ingredient/
Inputs
Product/
Outputs
Process
Instructions
Equipment
Requirements
F
o
r
m
u
l
a
Recipe
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
Recipe Management: Recipe Structure



Use this function to map a process in a recipe. The process is the top element in the process model. It
contains all the activities that are required to produce one or more products.
The recipe process comprises the process instructions and the equipment requirements
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-9
SAP AG 2006
Process of a Recipe
Recipe
Output Specs
Input Specs
Formula
Other
Information
Process Stage
Process
Operation
Process Process
Action Action
Process
Equipment
Requirements
Header Other Information
Process definition:
The process is the top element in the process model
It contains all the activities required to produce one or more products
It can be subdivided into various recipes stages
A recipe only has one process
Process definition:
The process is the top element in the process model
It contains all the activities required to produce one or more products
It can be subdivided into various recipes stages
A recipe only has one process



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-10
SAP AG 2006
Process Process
Process Stage Process Stage
Process Operation Process Operation
Process Action Process Action
01
0...N
01
0...N
01
0...N
Recipe
Process Stage
Process Operation
Process Action
1
0...N
1
0...N
1
0...N
Process Model
Process as per ISA S88 Extended Process Model
Independent Objects
(building blocks)
Independent Objects
(building blocks)
Dependent Objects
(within recipe)
Dependent Objects
(within recipe)
Process
Process Stage
Process Operation
Process Action
1
1...N
1
1...N
1
1...N
TEMPLATE



The process is the top element in the model. There is only one process in a recipe; it can be divided into
several stages, which, in turn, can be divided into different operations. Actions are located at the
lowest level in the hierarchy and are combined to form a process operation.
The bottom process elements in the hierarchy are always dependent on the top process elements. In this
model, there is a 1 to 1N relationship between the individual levels.
The process model describes the process part of the general and site recipe. Rather than referring to the
equipment, the process corresponds to a procedure that is linked to it.
To make Recipe Management faster and more efficient, the model was extended. Process elements can
exist as independent building blocks that are separate from higher process elements and can be used to
create new recipes.
The 1 to 1N relationship is now no longer mandatory. Each process element can be divided into
various lower process elements (this is optional). Lower-level process elements within a building block
are always dependent on the building block.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-11
SAP AG 2006
Example of a Process
Process / Recipe
Stage
Operation
Action Action
Make Apple Cookie
0010 Make dough
0010 Mix dry ingredients
0020 Add liquid ingredients
0020 Form and bake
0030 Package
0010 Add liquids to dry blend 0010 Add liquids to dry blend
0010 Set up mixer 0010 Set up mixer
0020 Add dry ingredients 0020 Add dry ingredients
0030 Blend dry ingredients 0030 Blend dry ingredients
0020 Mix dough 0020 Mix dough



Example of a process for food:
Making Apple Cookies
The process consists of stages, namely:
Make dough
Form and bake
Package
Stage 0010 Make dough consists of two operations, namely:
Mix dry ingredients
Add liquid ingredients
Operation 0010 Mix dry ingredients, of stage 0010, consists of three actions, namely:
Set up mixer
Add dry ingredients
Blend dry ingredients

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-12
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Stage
Process Stage:
Process stages are structured (in series, in parallel, or both) in
the process.
Process stages are primarily characterized by their mutual
independence, their assignment to a formula, and as a
bundle of operations.
You can create and edit process stages as independent
building blocks or as dependent elements in the recipe or in
the process.
You can optionally create stages from a pool of building
blocks.
0010 Make dough



On the Process tab page, you maintain and display the stages and operations.
If a process element has been created by copying a building block, the key of the original building block
is displayed in the original field.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-13
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Operation
0010 Mix dry ingredients
0030 Add liquid ingredients
Process Operation:
Process operations represent more extensive or detailed
process activities.
Unlike stages, operations are usually interdependent. For
example, a material can only be cooled if heating/baking has
taken place beforehand.
You cannot link a process operation directly to a formula.
You can create operations from a pool of building blocks.
You can define the relationships between operations using the
order in which they are created (item numbers).
Process operations can optionally be managed as independent
building blocks, or as dependent elements within a stage.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-14
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Stages and Operations
Stage Stage
Operation Operation
Origin of
building block



On the Process tab page, you can maintain and display the stages and operations
If a process element has been created by copying a building block, the key of the original building block
is displayed in the original field.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-15
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Actions
Process Action:
Process actions are smaller process activities that are
combined to carry out the process operation. Process actions
provide a more detailed description of how the operation is
executed (see also process action as per ISA S88).
Process actions can be managed as independent building
blocks, or as dependent elements within an operation as
defined by item numbers.
0010 Set up mixer 0010 Set up mixer
0020 Add dry ingredients 0020 Add dry ingredients
0030 Blend dry ingredients 0030 Blend dry ingredients



By choosing the Operations detail view from the detail structure tree, the actions can be displayed and
maintained.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-16
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Operations and Actions
Operation Operation
Action
Action Action



By choosing the Operations detail view from the detail structure tree, the actions can be displayed and
maintained.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-17
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Equipment Requirements
Equipment Requirements:
Equipment requirements are resources used in the production
process.
Equipment requirements define the associated characteristics
and value assignments.
Equipment requirements contain data in the form of
characteristics, text descriptions, attached documents, and/or
process parameters.
If you need similar equipment requirements in your recipes
and process elements, you can create the requirements as
building blocks that can be copied.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-18
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Equipment Requirements (2)
Equipment requirement
class
Equipment requirement
class
Equipment requirement characteristics
Equipment requirement characteristics



Each recipe contains equipment data (for example, boiler, mixer, furnace) with certain requirements
(size, speed, and so on). You can assign equipment requirements at the recipe, process, process stage,
process operation, and process action levels.
Prerequisites:
You have specified the classes. Choose Cross-Application Components Classification System
Master Data Classes.
You have defined the characteristics and characteristic values. Choose Cross-Application
Components Classification System Master Data Characteristics.
You have specified the value assignment types in Customizing for SAP Environment, Health and
Safety (EH&S) under Specify Value Assignment Types.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-19
SAP AG 2006
Process Elements: Process Parameters
Process parameter
Process parameter
Assigned to action
Assigned to action
Process parameters:
? Used to specify the process in greater dimensional detail
? You assign process parameters (with associated values) to the
appropriate process level: stage, operation or action
? Example parameters include temperature, density, and velocity
Process parameters:
? Used to specify the process in greater dimensional detail
? You assign process parameters (with associated values) to the
appropriate process level: stage, operation or action
? Example parameters include temperature, density, and velocity



Process parameters are used to specify the process in greater detail.
Use this function to assign process parameters with the associated parameter values to the recipe,
process elements in the recipe, and equipment requirements. These parameters include the temperature,
density, or velocity, for example.
The following parameters are available with the standard delivery Recipe Management 2.1:
SAP_RMS_PP_DENSITY Process Parameter (Density)
SAP_RMS_PP_ENERGY Process Parameter (Energy)
SAP_RMS_PP_LENGTH Process Parameter (Length)
SAP_RMS_PP_MASS Process Parameter (Mass)
SAP_RMS_PP_POWER Process Parameter (Power)
SAP_RMS_PP_PRES Process Parameter (Pressure)
SAP_RMS_PP_TEMP Process Parameter (Temperature)
SAP_RMS_PP_TIME Process Parameter (Time)
SAP_RMS_PP_VELO Process Parameter (Velocity)
SAP_RMS_PP_VOLUME Process Parameter (Volume)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-20
SAP AG 2006
km/h 200 220 180 Velocity SAP_RMS_PP_SPEED 0001 020 050
Comment UoM Target
Value
Max Min Crit Proc Para
Description
Value Assignment Type Sort. Action Oper Stage
At the appropriate process element level, you assign relevant
parameters (from the drop-down menu) in the Process Parameters tab.
Process parameters can be assigned to equipment requirements and
to detail parameters linked with the use of the equipment.
Values for Target, Min, or Max are entered whether the parameter is
critical or not.
Optionally, a comment that indicates the conditions of the process
parameter can be entered.
Example: Assign a process parameter to operation 020 Spin of stage
050 Recovery, which specifies the spinning velocity.
Process parameter is not critical.
Process Parameter: Example



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-21
SAP AG 2006
Process Parameter: Class Example



SAP_RMS_PP_VELO Process Parameter (Velocity)
The above example shows the definition of the Power process parameter.
The following characteristics are assigned to the class:
Description
Critical indicator
Minimum and maximum
Target value
Unit of measurement
The description is taken from the phrase that is assigned to the phrase set assigned to the description
characteristic (30 CHAR).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-22
SAP AG 2006
Quality Inspection
Details
Details
Standard inspection characteristics
Standard inspection characteristics
Inspection methods
Inspection methods



You can enter data for an in-process quality inspection. Every stage and operation in a general or site
recipe can be relevant for quality management (QM).
Integration:
When you transform a general or site recipe to a master recipe, the planned inspection properties
(inspection characteristics, inspection methods, and sampling procedures) are also transferred to the
master recipe. The QM data at the operation level in the general or site recipe is transformed to
phases; the QM data at the stage level is transformed to operations.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-23
SAP AG 2006
In-Process Control: IPC Inspection
Master inspection characteristic
Master inspection characteristic
Detail screen
Detail screen



Use an in-process control (IPC) inspection to specify quality inspections for the recipe objects formula,
stage, or operation. The individual characteristics and their methods are checked.
If you want to cancel the reference to the master inspection characteristic, set the Cancel Reference
indicator. You can then change some of the master inspection characteristic settings, such as weighting
of the characteristic, target value, tolerance limits, and so on. If you set the indicator, you have to edit all
of the inspection characteristics that are affected, not only the characteristics that you want to change.
If you want to enter and specify details for individual inspection characteristics, select the inspection
characteristic by double-clicking it. A detail screen appears.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-24
SAP AG 2006
Quality Management (QM)
You can enter data for quality control to accompany a process.
Every stage and operation in a general or site recipe can be relevant
to quality management as an in-process control point.
The formula for which you want to enter QM data contains a
stream as the output.
Use master inspection characteristics to implement a ready-
made system of attributes for production inspections.
Integration:
The system transfers the planned inspection elements
and some of their attributes (inspection characteristics,
inspection methods, and sampling procedures) to the
master recipe when you transform a general or site
recipe.
The QM data at operation level in the general or site
recipe is transformed into phases; the QM data at stage
level is transformed into operations.
You can enter data for quality control to accompany a process.
Every stage and operation in a general or site recipe can be relevant
to quality management as an in-process control point.
The formula for which you want to enter QM data contains a
stream as the output.
Use master inspection characteristics to implement a ready-
made system of attributes for production inspections.
Integration:
The system transfers the planned inspection elements
and some of their attributes (inspection characteristics,
inspection methods, and sampling procedures) to the
master recipe when you transform a general or site
recipe.
The QM data at operation level in the general or site
recipe is transformed into phases; the QM data at stage
level is transformed into operations.



You can enter data for an in-process quality inspection. Every stage and operation in a general or site
recipe can be relevant for QM.
Integration:
When you transform a general or site recipe to a master recipe, the planned inspection properties
(inspection characteristics, inspection methods, and sampling procedures) are also transferred to the
master recipe. The QM data at the operation level in the general or site recipe is transformed into
phases; the QM data at the stage level is transformed into operations.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-25
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Process and Process Elements: Unit
Summary
You should now be able to:
Create process and process elements: Stage, operation,
and action
Define process-related equipment requirements
Define process parameters
Define in-process control inspection characteristics



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-26
Exercises


Unit: Recipe Process and Process Elements
Topic: Basic Process and Process Element
Functions


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Create and edit processes elements


Overview of the process to be created


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-27
1-1 Copy a recipe.
1-1-1 Create a new recipe by copying the recipe RM1_TEMPLATE and using the recipe
name recipe03_## (with ## being your initials).
1-1-2 Change the recipe description to ### General Recipe Apple Cookie (with ###
being your initials) and the person responsible to your training user.

2-1 Define the process and stage.
2-1-1 Create a stage with the following information:
Stage number: 10 Description: Make Dough
2-1-2 Create two operations with the following information:
Operation number: 10 Description: Mix Dry Ingredients
Operation number: 20 Description: Add Liquid Ingredients

Create three actions with the following information for operation 10:
Action number: 10 Description: Set Up Mixer
Action number: 20 Description: Add Dry Ingredients
Action number: 30 Description: Blend Dry Ingredients

3-1 (Optional): Define actions for stage 10, operation 20 with the following information:
Action number: 10 Description: Add Liquids to Dry Blend
Action number: 20 Description: Mix Dough

4-1 Define the equipment requirements.
4-1-1 Define the equipment requirements for the mixer in stage 10, operation 10, and
action 10 by using the following information:
Item number: 10 Class (from F4 drop down): MIXER
4-1-2 Define the equipment requirements details using the following information:
Speed of mixer: 180
Material mixer is made out of: STSTL (from F4 drop-down)

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-28
5-1 Enter process parameters for stage 0010, operation 0010, and action 0010 by using the
following information:
Sort Description Critical Min Max Target Unit Remark
0001 Power X 33 40 35.4 KW Mixer
power
0003 Temperature X 18 30 22.5 C Mixer
temperature

6-1 Quality management integration (IPC inspection)
6-1-1 Add a quality inspection characteristic to stage 0010, operation 0010. Use Master
Inspection Characteristic 50000001.
6-1-2 Enter the following detailed information in the detail screen for the temperature:
Insp. Det.: ### Measure by disinfects tube
Method: Measuring with platinum resistance
thermometer
Sample Drawing: Measure inside the dough, about 10 cm deep
Sampling Type: Fixed sample
Inspection Frequency: 1
Sample Size: 1
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-29
Solutions


Unit: Recipe Process and Process Elements
Topic: Basic Process and Process Element
Functions

Overview of the process to be created



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-30
1-1 Copy a recipe.
1-1-1 Place the cursor on the recipe line of the navigation tree. Right-click and choose
Create from the menu.
Enter the Target recipe name to recipe03_## (with # being your initials).


Choose the icon and the recipe will be created.
1-1-2 Change the recipe description to
### General Recipe Apple Cookie (with ### being your initials).
Change the person responsible to your training user.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-31
2-1 Define the process and stage.
2-1-1 Choose the Process tab page.
Choose Append Row or Insert Row .


First, create the required stage by entering the following information:
Stage number: 10 Description: Make Dough


Note: You have two options here. Either enter a number first and then a
description, or enter a description straight away and allow the system to
assign the number automatically after you have confirmed your entries.
Assign the numbers in groups of 10. You can automatically renumber the
numbers in groups of 10 after you have entered them by choosing
Renumber . If you want to add a stage between two other stages later,
choose Append Row and enter the required number. After you have
confirmed your entry, it is automatically moved to the correct position.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-32
2-1-2 Stay on the same entry screen and create the required operations.
To do so, add two rows under the 10-stage entry by choosingthe icon twice.


Enter the following information:
Operation number: 10 Description: Mix Dry Ingredients
Operation number: 20 Description: Add Liquid Ingredients


Choose ENTER and the system will fill in the stage number. Choose Save .
Create actions starting from the process of the recipe.
Double-click on operation 10 in the process view. The Process tab page for
processing operations appears.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-33
To create the actions, proceed as follows.
Add three rows by choosing the icon three times. Enter the following data:
Action number: 10 Description: Set Up Mixer
Action number: 20 Description: Add Dry Ingredients
Action number: 30 Description: Blend Dry Ingredients


Confirm and Save .

3-1 (Optional): Define actions for stage 10, operation 20.
Create actions from previous exercise by choosing the icon.
Double-click on operation 20 in the process view. The Process tab page for
processing operations appears. To create the actions, proceed as follows.
Add two rows by choosing the icon twice.
Enter the data.
Action number: 10 Description: Add Liquids to Dry Blend
Action number: 20 Description: Mix Dough


Confirm and save your entries. Stay in the recipe.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-34
4-1 Define the equipment requirement for the mixer in stage 10, operation 10, action 10.
4-1-1 Reload ###_recipe03 into session by double-clicking the recipe in the workbench
navigation area (upper left under Recipe favorites).
Choose Expand next to Stage 10 and next to Operation 10 in the Detailed
Structure section of the property tree (lower left corner).


Double-click on Action 10. Select the Equipment tab page for Stage 10, Operation
10, Action 10.
Enter item data in the Equipment Requirements tab page:
Item number: 10 Class (by F4 drop down): MIXER
Select ENTER and the requirements will appear in the lower portion of the screen.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-35
4-1-2 Enter the characteristic values under the Requirements tab on the lower portion of
the screen:
Speed of mixer: 180
Material mixer is made out of: STSTL (from F4 drop-down)
Select ENTER (characteristic descriptions will fill in) and Save your entries.


5-1 Choose the Process Parameters tab page on the last screen from the previous exercise.
Add a row by choosing Create .


Enter the following process parameters:
Sort Description Critical Min Max Target Unit Remark
0001 Power X 33 40 35.4 KW Mixer
power
0003 Temperature X 18 30 22.5 C Mixer
temperature
Note: You choose parameters for the Sort and Target fields by pressing F4. A dialog box
will appear where you can select parameters from the list of available parameters.
You need not enter a Value assignment type parameter.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-36


Confirm and save your entries.

6-1 Quality management integration (IPC inspection)
6-1-1 Navigate to stage 0010, operation 0010

Choose the QM tab page.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-37
Enter the temperature (key 50000001) in the MstrCharac field.


Double-click on QM inspection characteristic 50000001.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 8-38
6-1-2 Enter the following detailed information in the Detail screen for the temperature:
Insp. Det.: ### Measure by disinfects tube
Method: Measuring with platinum resistance
thermometer
Sample Drawing: Measure inside the dough, about 10 cm deep
Sampling Type: Fixed sample
Inspection Frequency: 1
Sample Size: 1

Open the Detail screen by double-clicking the QM inspection characteristic record.
All data from the definition of the master characteristic is copied to the recipe IPC
inspection.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Management
Formula Basics



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-2
SAP AG 2006
Formula overview
Tabs:
? Header
? Quantities
? Input and Output
Layouts
Basic Data
Process
Overrun
Total Solids
Volume Calculation
? Composition
Bill of material creation (BOM)
Contents:
Recipe Management Formula Basics



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-3
SAP AG 2006
View recipe stage formulas
Edit formulas
View formula header information
Edit quantity data
Edit input and output information
Display/calculate composition
Create and view bills of materials (BOMs)
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Recipe Management Formula Basics : Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-6
SAP AG 2006
Formulas
Selected
recipe
Selected
recipe
Selected stage
formula
Selected stage
formula
Formula
tabs
Formula
tabs
Formula
tabs
list
Formula
tabs
list



Select a recipe by choosing it in your Favorites list or double-clicking on it from the hit list of recipes.
Select stage.
Select formula.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-7
SAP AG 2006
Formula Header Information
Formula information:
Number, Type, Auth Group,
and Note
Formula information:
Number, Type, Auth Group,
and Note
Creation and last
change information
Creation and last
change information
Change
control
information
(ECM)
Change
control
information
(ECM)
Validity period
Validity period
Validity period
Validity period



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-8
SAP AG 2006
Quantity Data
Reaction and
Evaporation
flags
Reaction and
Evaporation
flags
Input qty
Input qty
Output quantity
Output quantity
Unit of Measure for all quantities
Unit of Measure for all quantities
Layouts
Layouts
Quantities for
mass
Quantities for
mass



Layouts: Controls the fields that are shown on the Quantities and the Input and Output tabs.
Unit of Measure converts amounts (quantities and mass).
The Evaporation flag allows the quantity of the output product to be manually adjusted to account for
moisture loss/absorption.
The Reaction flag allows the composition (see Composition tab) to be manually maintained.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-9
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Basic Data Layout View (Screen 1)
Item
Number
Item
Number
Substance
Substance
Material
Material
Component
Type
Component
Type
Quantity
Quantity
Unit of
Measure
Unit of
Measure
Primary
Output
flag
Primary
Output
flag
Description
Description
Exception
Value
Exception
Value
Basic
Data
Layout
Basic
Data
Layout



Layouts can be adjusted or created (via Configuration) to show different or similar fields.
Basic data layout (delivered by SAP) has the fields shown above and on the next page.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-10
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Basic Data Layout View (Screen 2)
Percentage
Mass
Percentage
Mass Mass
Mass
Upper
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Lower
Limit
Basic Data Layout
Basic Data Layout



Mass of formula item
Dependencies
- The unit of mass corresponds to the unit of the target quantity, as long as this is specified in the
dimension of a mass. If the target quantity is not specified in the dimension of a mass, the system
uses the unit of mass that was specified as the appropriate dimension in Customizing.
Percentage Mass of formula item
The percentage mass specifies the proportion of the formula item as a percentage of the total
quantity.
The appropriate target quantity is taken as the total quantity if this is specified in the dimension of a
mass. If a target quantity has not been specified or the target quantity is specified in the dimension of
a volume, the proportion of the formula item as a percentage refers to the total mass of all specified
formula items.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-11
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Process Layout View (Screen 1)
Action
Action
Free Field
Free Field
Alternate No.
Alternate No.
Operation
Operation
Overrun Factor
Overrun Factor
Process layout
Process layout
Density
Density
Density of Aeration
Density of Aeration
UOM for Density of
Aeration
UOM for Density of
Aeration
UOM Text Density
UOM Text Density
UOM Text Density
with Overflow
UOM Text Density
with Overflow



The Process layout shown above only identifies the additional fields that come as default settings. Some
of the same fields as in the Basic Data layout are also delivered
Action
Item number of the action in the recipe
Free Field
Freely available field of type character string with 30 characters
Alternate No.
Use this number to determine the sequence of alternate items belonging to the same standard item
Operation
Used to display the recipe operation to which a formula item has been assigned
Overrun factor
Used to calculate the volume from the mass (and vice versa) if an overrun is taken into account, that
is, if a whipping or aeration process takes place
The volume after the whipping/aeration process is calculated using the following formula:
- Volume = (mass * (100 + overrun factor)) / (100 * density)
Overrun factor corresponds to the increase in volume as a percentage and can be specified as an
integer value between 0 and 999
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-12
Density
The value displayed here by the system for the density and unit comes from the substance
specification property tree and from the value assignment type and characteristic that you defined in
Customizing for Formulas in the IMG activity Define and Assign Values to Environment Parameters
in the FRML_ESTCAT_DENSITY and FRML_ATNAM_DENSITY environment parameters.
The system uses the density to convert volume into mass, and vice versa.
Density of Aeration
Describes the relationship between the mass and the volume of the aeration
Dependencies
- The density of aerated products for input substances is read from the specification. You specify
the density of aerated products value assignment type using the
FRML_ESTCAT_DENSITY_OVR environment parameter, and the characteristic that belongs to
it using the FRML_ATNAM_DENSITY_OVR environment parameter. The system calculates the
value for the primary output from the mass and volume of the aeration.
UOM for Density of Aeration
Unit of measure for the Density of Aeration field
UOM Text Density
Description for the unit of measure of the Density of Aeration field
UOM Text Density with Overflow
Description for the unit of measure of the Density with Overflow field
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-13
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Process Layout View (Screen 2)
Group Item flag
Group Item flag
Alternate Items
Exist flag
Alternate Items
Exist flag
Group Items
Exist flag
Group Items
Exist flag
Item is Stream
Item is Stream
Standard
Explosion flag
Standard
Explosion flag
Process layout
Process layout
Percentage
Mass
Percentage
Mass
Mass
Mass
Quantity per
Piece
Quantity per
Piece
Conversion
Unit from
Piece to
Mass/Vol
Conversion
Unit from
Piece to
Mass/Vol
Pieces
Pieces
Reconstitution
Rate
Reconstitution
Rate



Group Item (Group Item flag)
Indicates that the item is a group item
Alternative Items Exist
Indicates that one or more alternative items were entered for a standard item
You can use the Change Standard Item function to exchange standard items for alternative items,
and vice versa afterwards.
Dependencies:
- When you copy or delete a standard item, the system also copies or deletes its alternative items.
Depending on your Customizing or user settings, the system issues a warning when you delete a
standard item with alternative items (see environment parameter
FRML_SUPRESS_MESSAGES).
Group Items Exist
Shows that group items exist
Dependencies:
- The system sets this indicator when generating the I/O Materials view if several materials are
assigned to a substance. The following material items are generated for the substance item:
- A leading material item
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-14
- A group item for each of the other materials
- You can copy or delete a group item only together with its leading material item. You cannot
change its material number.
Item is Output of Another Formula (Item is Stream flag)
The system sets this indicator for all input substances and materials of a formula that are assigned to
another formula as output substances or materials.
Standard Explosion
Specifies that the current formula is used by default to explode the substance or material
For more information about formula explosion, see the Recipe Management documentation.
Use:
- This indicator must be set for one output, that is, if a material or substance is an output in several
formulas, you may only set this indicator in one formula for the material or the substance. If a
substance is assigned to a material, you may only set this indicator for the substance and the
material in the same formula
Percentage Mass of Formula Item:
- Specifies the proportion of the formula item as a percentage of the total quantity
- The appropriate target quantity is taken as the total quantity if this is specified in the dimension
of a mass. If a target quantity has not been specified, or the target quantity is specified in the
dimension of a volume, the proportion of the formula item as a percentage refers to the total
mass of all specified formula items.
Mass
The unit of mass corresponds to the unit of the target quantity, as long as this is specified in the
dimension of a mass. If the target quantity is not specified in the dimension of a mass, the system
uses the unit of mass that was specified as the appropriate dimension in Customizing.
Quantity per Piece
Specifies the quantity per piece for a formula item, that is, for a substance, material, or stream
Dependencies:
- The value that the system displays here is the value you specified for substances and materials in
the property tree of the specification of the substance, and for streams in the formula property
tree. You define in which value assignment type and characteristic you enter the quantity per
piece in Customizing for Recipe Management under Define and Assign Values to Environment
Parameters and in the FRML_ESTCAT_PIECE_MASS (value assignment type piece - mass) and
FRML_ATNAM_PIECE_MASS (characteristic name piece - mass) environment parameters.
Conversion Unit from Piece to Mass/Vol
Unit of measure for conversion of pieces to mass or volume
Pieces
Define the unit referred to as a piece by means of an environment parameter in Customizing for
Formulas.
To convert mass or volume into piece, the system uses a factor stored in the specification property
tree. You can also define this property by means of an environment parameter.
If you have specified both a factor for converting volume to piece and for converting mass to piece,
the factor for mass to piece takes precedence and is also used for calculating the volume.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-15
Reconstitution Rate
Specifies how much of the substance in question dissolves in a particular amount of liquid
Use:
- The reconstitution rate is specified for products that dissolve in liquid. You specify the
reconstitution rate in the primary output and it is calculated for the remaining input and output
materials and substances using the proportions of these substances and materials.
Example:
- 100g of packet soup contains 2g of salt and 98g of vegetable extract. The consumer dissolves the
end product in 1 liter of water. This means the soup has a reconstitution rate of 100g/l. This value
is specified in the specification of the substance packet soup and is then distributed in the input
substances. Therefore, salt has a value of 2g/l and the vegetable extract has a value of 98g/l.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-16
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Process Layout View (Screen 3)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-17
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Overrun (Aeration) Layout View
Aeration
Density
Unit of
Measure
Aeration
Density
Unit of
Measure
Aeration
Density
Aeration
Density
Mass
Percentage
Mass
Percentage
Overrun
Factor
Overrun
Factor
Volume
with
Overrun
Volume
with
Overrun
Aeration
Volume
Percentage
Aeration
Volume
Percentage
Overrun
layout
Overrun
layout



Density of Aerated Products of Formula Item
Describes the relationship between the mass and the volume of the aeration
Dependencies:
- The density of aerated products for input substances is read from the specification. You specify
the density of aerated products value assignment type using the
FRML_ESTCAT_DENSITY_OVR environment parameter, and the characteristic that belongs to
it using the FRML_ATNAM_DENSITY_OVR environment parameter. The system calculates the
value for the primary output from the mass and volume of the aeration.
Percentage Mass of Formula Item
Specifies the proportion of the formula item as a percentage of the total quantity
The appropriate target quantity is taken as the total quantity if this is specified in the dimension of a
mass. If a target quantity has not been specified, or the target quantity is specified in the dimension
of a volume, the proportion of the formula item as a percentage refers to the total mass of all
specified formula items.
Overrun Factor
Used to calculate the volume from the mass (and vice versa) if an overrun is taken into account, that
is, if a whipping or aeration process takes place
The volume after the whipping/aeration process is calculated using the following formula:
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-18
- Volume = (mass * (100 + overrun factor)) / (100 * density)
The overrun factor corresponds to the increase in volume as a percentage and can be specified as an
integer value between 0 and 999.
Volume of Formula Item with Overrun
Dependencies:
- The volume with overrun is calculated in the following way:
- Normal volume * (100 + overrun factor) / 100
- The normal volume is calculated from mass / density.
Proportion of Volume of Formula Item with Aerated Volume
Use:
- The total of the aerated volumes of the input items serves as the reference quantity for the
calculation of the percentages.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-19
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Total Solids Layout View
Total
Solids
Percent
Total
Solids
Percent
Proportion of
Total Solids in
Total Mass
Proportion of
Total Solids in
Total Mass
Total
Solids
Total
Solids
Mass
Percentage
Mass
Percentage
Proportion of
Total Solids
Proportion of
Total Solids
Total
Solids
layout
Total
Solids
layout



Proportion of Total Solids in a Formula Item
Specifies the percentage of total solids in the total mass of a material or substance
Example:
Item Mass Total Solids TS % Spec.
10 500g 300g 60 %
20 1000g 800g 80 %
Percentage Mass of Formula Item
Specifies the proportion of the formula item as a percentage of the total quantity
The appropriate target quantity is taken as the total quantity if this is specified in the dimension of a
mass. If a target quantity has not been specified, or the target quantity is specified in the dimension
of a volume, the proportion of the formula item as a percentage refers to the total mass of all
specified formula items.
Total Solids of Formula Item
Dependencies:
- The total solids is calculated from the mass of the formula item and the percentage of total solids
specified in the property tree of the relevant specification.
Proportion of Total Solids in Total Mass of All Formula Items
Specifies the percentage of total solids of the formula item in the total mass of all formula items
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-20
Total Solids Proportion of Total Solids of all Formula Items
Specifies the percentage of total solids of the formula item in the total solids of all formula item
Example:
Item Mass Total Solids Total Solids %
10 500g 300g 20.0 %
20 500g 400g 26.7 %
30 1000g 800g 53.3 %
Total solids of all items: 1500 g
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-21
SAP AG 2006
Input and Output: Volume Calculation Layout View
Volume
Proportion
Volume
Proportion
Volume
Volume
Mass
Percentage
Mass
Percentage
Density
Density
Volume
Calculation
layout
Volume
Calculation
layout



Density of Formula Item
Dependencies:
- The value displayed for the density and unit comes from the substance specification property tree
and from the value assignment type and characteristic that you defined in Customizing for
Formulas in the IMG activity Define and Assign Values to Environment Parameters in the
FRML_ESTCAT_DENSITY and FRML_ATNAM_DENSITY environment parameters.
- The system uses the density to convert volume into mass, and vice versa.
Percentage Mass of Formula Item
Specifies the proportion of the formula item as a percentage of the total quantity
The appropriate target quantity is taken as the total quantity if this is specified in the dimension of a
mass. If a target quantity has not been specified, or the target quantity is specified in the dimension
of a volume, the proportion of the formula item as a percentage refers to the total mass of all
specified formula items.
Volume of Formula Item
Dependencies:
- The base quantity unit serves as the unit of volume, provided that it has been specified as a
volume. If the base quantity has not been specified as a volume, the volume unit that is specified
in Customizing is chosen as corresponding to the base unit of measure.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-22
- The system calculates the volume from the available data from the specification or material.
Proportion of Volume of Formula Item
Specifies the proportion of the volume of the formula item in the target input quantity or in the total
of input quantities already specified, and in the base quantity or in the total of output quantities
already specified.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-23
SAP AG 2006
Composition
Components
Components
Component
Percentage
Component
Percentage



Composition information on the Components tab can be generated automatically before the tab is
displayed (via explosion scopes) or via the Calculate Template Values.
Ingredients are shown in percentage of output product from highest to lowest amount.
Ingredients are grouped (added) together by substance and component type.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-24
SAP AG 2006
Bill of Material: Creation
Bill of material
Creation button
Bill of material
Creation button



Bills of material (BOMs) are created from the Input and Output tab within a formula.
BOMs are created for one formula only, and not for all formulas within a recipe.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-25
SAP AG 2006
Bill of Material: Example BOM



This is the bill of material that results from the BOM creation within a Recipe Management formula.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-26
SAP AG 2006
You should now be able to:
Formula Basics: Unit Summary
View recipe stage formulas
Edit formulas
View formula header information
Edit quantity data
Edit input and output information
Display/calculate composition
Create and view bills of materials (BOMs)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-27
Exercises


Unit: Recipe Management Formula Basics
Topic: Basic Formula Functions

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Edit formulas
Add input and output substances
View the composition
Use alternative materials
Generate a bill of material

A new product is to be introduced; it takes an existing recipe and
adds a new ingredient. This product needs to be analyzed to
ensure that the composition is correct. You then need to convert
the formula into a BOM so it can be produced.


1-1 Create recipe using sample recipe PLM160_FORMULA_EXERCISES, replacing
PLM160 with your initials.
1-1-1 Choose Recipe in the Recipe Management Workbench by right-clicking and
choosing Create.
1-1-2 In the window, enter PLM160_FORMULA_EXERCISES in the Source field,
select General Recipe in the Target drop-down list, and enter
XXX_FORMULA_EXERCISES (where XXX is your initials) in the Target formula
name field.
1-1-3 Enter your initials and Apple at the beginning of the Description field, todays date
in the Valid from field, and 12/31/9999 in the Valid to field.
1-1-4 Expand Stage 10 in your recipe by clicking on the icon in the Detail Data
section. Select the recipe for stage 10 by double-clicking the formula.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-28
Review the formula you selected to see the different types of data used to define a formula. A
listing and brief explanation of the formula tab pages is provided in the table below.

Features of Formula Data Maintenance
The following tab-pages are supplied with the standard system.

View Meaning
Header
You enter administration data here and also set the Consistent, Reaction,
Evaporation, and Synchronization indicators as required.
Scope of Application
Here you specify the validity of the formula in terms of time, region, and
organization, and also specify the status of the formula. This view can
only be used for independent formulas. In dependent formulas, the
statuses and scopes of application of the recipe to which they belong
apply.
This view is only available in INDEPENDENT formulas.
Quantities
See Totals Calculation.
Input and Output Here you specify the input and output substances or materials of the
formula and their quantities and, therefore, describe the input and output
of a procedure from an ingredient point of view. You enter the ingredients
that are physically involved in the process as real substances.
Aggregation
The formulas of the recipe are aggregated in this view. A formula
explosion is also performed within the formulas of the recipe.
Ingredients
The system displays the ingredients of the formula here. It determines
these from the current formula data when you call the tab-page. It also
performs a formula explosion with the List of Ingredients (Specification)
(OOP_S) explosion scope.
Composition
In this view, you describe the analytical composition of the output
substances as they are produced in the process. The ingredients can be
both real substances and listed substances. They describe the relevant
attributes of an output substance.
Nutrient Composition
Here the system displays an overview of all the nutrient information for all
the substances that occur in the formula.
Nutrients
Here the system displays all the nutrient information in detail for the
output substance of the formula.
Costs
In this view, the system displays the costs for the primary output of the
formula. It determines the costs from the current formula data when you
choose the tab page. It also performs a formula explosion with the List of
Raw Substances (Materials) (IRL_M) or List of Raw Substances
(Specifications) (IRL_S) explosion scope.
Diet Suitability Evaluation In this view, the system displays the contribution of each input substance
as well as the final evaluation, the suitability of the output product. These
are defined via Diet Groups and usage.
This view is only available in dependant formulas.
Diet Suitability This view displays the final determination (similar to Nutrient
Contribution and Nutrient tab pages). These are defined via Diet Groups
and usage.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-29
View Meaning
Key Figures This view allows the calculation of values based on data from an existing
formula view. This functionality requires a function module (program) to
perform the calculation.
Identifiers
You specify the identifiers of the formula here.
This view is only available in independent formulas.
QM
Here you enter the quality management data for an output stream.
This view can only be used for dependent formulas where a stream is
used.
Configuration
You use the Configuration view to determine which views for editing
formulas are displayed.

2-1 Header tab page
2-1-1 Select the Header tab. Review the information that is displayed. It should show
that you created this formula.

3-1 Quantities tab page
3-1-1 Select the Quantities tab. Review the information that is displayed.

4-1 Input and Output tab page
4-1-1 Select the Input and Output tab. Review the information that is displayed.
4-1-2 Add Apple, pieces as an input into this formula. Enter substance SBST_4723, a
quantity of 30 and a unit of measure of LB.
4-1-3 Reduce the amount of water, SBST_4712, from 295 to 265.

5-1 Composition tab page
5-1-1 Select the Composition tab. Review the information that is displayed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-30
6-1 Use material alternatives.
Alternative materials are defined by assigning two or more materials to one substance. This
is performed in the header view of the substance.
6-1-1 Choose the Input and Output tab page again and choose Generate I/O Materials
to perform this function.
6-1-2 A screen is displayed for you to choose between the two alternative materials.
Choose the material RMATL_4732 by choosing the Standard Item button. Choose
the material RMATL_4732A (as the alternate) by selecting the Grp field. Then
choose Generate I/O Materials to complete the process.

7-1 Calculate views automatically in the formula by formula explosion. The system
automatically calculates views from the input and output substances.
7-1-1 Aggregation
Aggregation The formulas of the recipe are aggregated in this view.
A formula explosion is also performed within the
formulas of the recipe.
The calculation base can be changed from I/O substances to I/O materials.

7-1-2 Ingredients
Ingredients The system displays the ingredients of the formula
here. It determines these from the current formula data
when you call the tab page. It also performs a formula
explosion of the Ingredients (Specification) (OOP_S)
explosion scope.

7-1-3 Nutrient Composition
Nutrient
Composition
Here the system displays an overview of all the nutrient
information for all the substances that occur in the
formula.

7-1-4 Composition
Composition On this tab page, you describe the analytical
composition of the output substances as they are
produced in the process. The ingredients can be both
real substances and listed substances. They describe
the relevant attributes of an output substance.
Note: The composition is calculated by using the Standard Composition property
stored in the property tree for each input substance.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-31
7-1-5 Nutrients
Nutrients Here the system displays all the nutrient information in
detail for the output substance of the formula.

7-1-6 Costs
Costs In this view, the system displays the costs for the
primary output of the formula. It determines the costs
from the current formula data when you call the tab
page. It also performs a formula explosion with the List
of Raw Substances (Materials) (IRL_M) or List of Raw
Substances (Specifications) (IRL_S) explosion scope.

7-1-7 Diet Suitability Evaluation
Diet
Suitability
Evaluation
In this view the system displays the contribution of
each input substance as well as the final evaluation, the
suitability of the output product. These are defined via
Diet Groups and usage.

7-1-8 Diet Suitability
Diet
Suitability
This view displays the final determination (similar to
Nutrient Contribution and Nutrient tab pages). These
are defined via Diet Groups and usage.

7-1-9 Key Figures
Key Figures This view allows the calculation of values based on
data from an existing formula view. This functionality
requires a function module (program) to perform the
calculation.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-32
8-1 Generate the bill of material.
It is possible to generate the bill of material (BOM) for production planning (PP) from
the Input and Output tab page.
For this exercise, this process will not create the BOM; it will only change the BOM.
Note: There is only one material for all people in the class. Therefore, each person
will be changing, not creating, the BOM. Each person should do this at
different times in order to see the effect of the change.
8-1-1 Navigate to the stage 30 Dependant Recipe-Stage Formula. Select the Input
and Output tab page.

Choose Generate BOM .
8-1-2 The BOM can be displayed or maintained using transaction CS03 or by
choosing Logistics Production Master Data Bills of Material Bill
of Material Material BOM Display.
Enter the key of the output material:

Material: CPF10104A
BOM Usage: 1
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-33
Solutions


Unit: Recipe Management Formula Basics
Topic: Basic Formula Functions

1-1 Create recipe using sample recipe PLM160_FORMULA_EXERCISES, replacing
PLM160 with your initials.
1-1-1 Choose Recipe in the Recipe Management Workbench by right-clicking and
choosing Create.


1-1-2 In the window, enter PLM160_FORMULA_EXERCISES in the Source field,
select S_RCP_GR General Recipe in the Target drop-down list, and enter
XXX_FORMULA_EXERCISES (where XXX is your initials) in the Target
formula name field.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-34


1-1-3 Enter your initials and Apple at the beginning of the Description field, todays date
in the Valid from field, and 12/31/9999 in the Valid to field.


1-1-4 Expand Stage 10 in your recipe by clicking on the icon in the Detail Data
section. Select the recipe for stage 10 by double-clicking the formula.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-35


2-1 Header tab page
2-1-1 Select the Header tab. Review the information that is displayed. It should show that
you created this formula.

3-1 Quantities tab page
3-1-1 Select the Quantities tab. Review the information that is displayed.

4-1 Input and Output tab page
4-1-1 Select the Input and Output tab. Review the information that is displayed.
4-1-2 Add Apple, pieces as an input into this formula. Enter substance SBST_4723, a
quantity of 30 and a unit of measure of LB.
4-1-3 Reduce the amount of water, SBST_4712, from 295 to 265.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-36
5-1 Composition tab page
5-1-1 Select the Composition tab. Review the information that is displayed.

6-1 Use material alternatives.
Alternative materials are defined by assigning two or more materials to one substance. This
is performed in the header view of the substance.
6-1-1 Choose the Input and Output tab page again and choose Generate Materials to
perform this function.


6-1-2 A screen is displayed for you to choose between the two alternative materials.
Choose the material RMATL_4732 by choosing the Standard Item button. Choose
the material RMATL_4732A (as the alternate) by selecting the Grp field. Then
choose Generate I/O Materials to complete the process.


7-1 Calculate views automatically in the formula by formula explosion. The system
automatically calculates views from the input and output substances.
7-1-1 Aggregation
Aggregation
The formulas of the recipe are aggregated in this view. A formula
explosion is also performed within the formulas of the recipe.
The calculation base can be changed from I/O substances to I/O materials.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-37
7-1-2 Ingredients
Ingredients
The system displays the ingredients of the formula here. It
determines these from the current formula data when you call the
tab-page. It also performs a formula explosion of the Ingredients
(Specification) (OOP_S) explosion scope.

7-1-3 Nutrient Composition
Nutrient
Composition
Here the system displays an overview of all the nutrient
information for all the substances that occur in the formula.

7-1-4 Composition
Composition
On this tab-page, you describe the analytical composition of the
output substances as they are produced in the process. The
ingredients can be both real substances and listed substances.
They describe the relevant attributes of an output substance.

Note: The composition is calculated by using the Standard Composition property
stored in the property tree for each input substance.

7-1-5 Nutrients
Nutrients
Here the system displays all the nutrient information in detail for
the output substance of the formula.

7-1-6 Costs
Costs
In this view the system displays the costs for the primary output of
the formula. It determines the costs from the current formula data
when you call the tab page. It also performs a formula explosion
with the List of Raw Substances (Materials) (IRL_M) or List of
Raw Substances (Specifications) (IRL_S) explosion scope.

7-1-7 Diet Suitability Evaluation
Diet Suitability
Evaluation
In this view the system displays the contribution of each input
substance as well as the final evaluation, the suitability of the
output product. These are defined via Diet Groups and usage.

7-1-8 Diet Suitability
Diet Suitability
This view displays the final determination (similar to Nutrient
Contribution and Nutrient tab pages). These are defined via Diet
Groups and usage.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 9-38
7-1-9 Key Figures
Key Figures
This view allows the calculation of values based on data from an
existing formula view. This functionality requires a function
module (program) to perform the calculation.

8-1 Generate the bill of material.
It is possible to generate the bill of material (BOM) for production planning (PP) from the
Input and Output tab page.
For this exercise, this process will not create the BOM; it will only change the BOM.

Note: There is only one material for all people in the class. Therefore, each person will be
changing, not creating, the BOM. Each person should do this at different times in
order to see the effect of the change.
8-1-1 Navigate to the stage 30 Dependant Recipe-Stage Formula. Select the Input and
Output tab page.

Choose Generate BOM .
8-1-2 The BOM can be displayed or maintained using transaction CS03 or by choosing
Logistics Production Master Data Bills of Material Bill of Material
Material BOM Display.
Enter the key of the output material:

Material: CPF10104A
BOM Usage: 1

Note: If a BOM has already been created for this material, then this step creates
an alternative. The alternatives can be viewed by looking at the options in
the CS03 screen. By viewing the BOM headers Administration screen, you
can determine who created which version.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe
Management
Formula:
Advanced Topics



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-2
SAP AG 2006
Consistency
Synchronization
Costing
Standardization
Formula explosion
Formula explosion modeling
Process Building blocks
Contents:
Recipe Management Formula: Advanced Topics



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-3
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM RM Formula: Formula:
Advanced Topics Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-5
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
RM Formula: Advanced Topics: Unit Objectives
Explain what building blocks are and how they are used
Explain the difference between the three types of
formulas
Use a stream to link process steps
View the total solids and volume calculations
Explain the use of the reaction flag
Use of the consistency and synchronization processes
Set the output quantity by using evaporation
Perform standardization
View costing information
Explain formula explosion and modeling



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-6
SAP AG 2006
Building Blocks
Building Blocks



Building blocks can be processs (recipes, stages, and so on), stages (with operations and actions),
operations (with actions) or actions.
Stage building blocks can consist of just a formula, or they can also include operations and actions.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-7
SAP AG 2006
Formula Types: Independent
Independent formula
Independent formula



Independent formulas are not directly linked to any recipe.
Independent formulas can be used as a link or template for many recipes, and some changes to the
formula are reflected in all recipes that use this formula.
Independent formulas are generally not used.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-8
SAP AG 2006
Formula Types: Dependent
Recipe-dependent formula
Recipe-dependent formula
Stage-dependant
formula
Stage-dependant
formula



Dependent formulas are contained in only one recipe or recipe stage.
Changes are made within stage-dependent formulas.
A recipe-dependent formula is an overall view of the recipe and includes information from the last
stage. This formula is generally generated automatically.
A recipe-dependent formula can be used as a starting point when creating a recipe, but this technique is
generally not used.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-9
SAP AG 2006
Example of a Recipe with Dependent Formulas
Make Apple Cookie
0010 Make dough
0010 Mix dry ingredients
0030 Add liquid ingredients
0010 Add liquids to dry blend 0010 Add liquids to dry blend
0010 Set up mixer 0010 Set up mixer
0020 Add dry ingredients 0020 Add dry ingredients
0030 Blend dry ingredients 0030 Blend dry ingredients
0020 Mix dough 0020 Mix dough
Formula (synchronized)
Stage formula with output stream with output stream
Stage formula
Process / Recipe
Stage
Operation
Action Action
Formula



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-10
SAP AG 2006
Example of a Recipe with Dependent Formulas (2)
0010 Process dough
0020 Form and bake
0030 Package
0010 Extrude dough 0010 Extrude dough
0020 Form cookies 0020 Form cookies
Stage formula with input stream with input stream
0020 Bake cookies
0010 Prepare oven 0010 Prepare oven



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-11
SAP AG 2006
Dependent Stage Formulas with Stream
Dependent Recipe-
Stage Formula
Dependent Recipe-
Stage Formula
Evaporation
Evaporation
Generate I/O
materials
Generate I/O
materials
Calculate
composition
Calculate
composition
Output stream
Output stream



Calculate composition is not required. The system can be configured to always calculate the
composition when the tab is activated.
Generating the I/O materials is not required in the Input and Output tab. This is only required if the
Input Substances and Input Materials tabs are used.
Streams are used when an actual product is not created in a stage, but is just a processing step. These are
used to link the processing steps to further actions.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-12
SAP AG 2006
Enhanced Recipe: Synchronization
Make Apple Cookie
0010 Make dough
0010 Mix dry ingredients
0010 Set up mixer 0010 Set up mixer
Formula synchronized
Formula mix dough
0010 Process dough
0020 Form and bake
0030 Package
Formula bake cookies
0010 Extrude dough 0010 Extrude dough
Synchronization



The figure above is an example of how the recipe-dependent formula is created via synchronization.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-13
SAP AG 2006
Stage-Dependant Formula Control Indicators:
Consistency, Reaction, and Evaporation
Consistency
Consistency
Consistency
Consistency
Reaction
Reaction
Evaporation
Evaporation
Absolute
Losses
Absolute
Losses



The Consistency Check button is used to run the standard or customer-written consistency check rules.
If the checks pass or the user overrides the warnings, then the Consistency Check flag (to the left of the
button) is set. The Consistency Check flag can be manually set without running the checks by using the
Select/Deselect Consistency button.
Note: The Consistency Check flag is one of the checks that is run for the recipe consistency check. If it
is not set, a warning is issued.
The Reaction flag can be set by choosing the Reaction button. This enables the composition to be
manually maintained.
The Evaporation/Absorption flag can be set by choosing the Evap/Aborptn button. This enables the
quantity of the output product to be manually adjusted to account for evaporation or absorption.
The Absolute Losses flag
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-14
SAP AG 2006
Recipe-Dependant Formula Control Indicators:
Synchronization
Synchronization
Synchronization



The Synchronization button is used to set the recipe-dependant formula to the overall (last stage
formula) values. It populates (and stores) the information for the formula tabs. Each change to a stage-
dependant formula is automatically reflected in the recipe-dependant formula.
Once the Synchronization flag is set, the Consistency, Reaction, Evaporation/Absorption, and Absolute
Losses flags can no longer be manually set. They are set to correspond to the stage-dependant formula
flags for these fields.
Normally, the Consistency, Reaction, Evaporation/Absorption, and Absolute Losses flags are not
manually set on the recipe-dependant formula.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-15
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Control Indicators: Consistency
Consistency
Consistency



The recipe Consistency Check button is used to run the standard or customer-written consistency check
rules. If the checks pass or the user overrides the warnings, then the Consistency Check flag (to the right
of the button) is set.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-16
SAP AG 2006
Stage-Dependant Formula: Evaporation
Set Evaporation flag
Set Evaporation flag



Set the Evaporation switch.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-17
SAP AG 2006
Stage-Dependant Formula: Evaporation (2)
Change Output
Substance Quantity
Change Output
Substance Quantity



You can change the output product quantity to reflect either evaporation (reduction in quantity) or
absorption (increase in quantity).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-18
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Costing (Screen 1)
Recalculate
Price
Recalculate
Price
Use
Material
Price
Use
Material
Price
Use
Substance
Price
Use
Substance
Price
Use
Manually
Set Price
Use
Manually
Set Price
Undo Price
Changes
Undo Price
Changes



The Recipe costing tab is used to estimate the cost of the product. It uses the material price as a default.
The user can indicate for one or more substances if the substance or a manually entered price should
be used.
You can change the base quantity and unit of measure for which the price is to be calculated.
To recalculate the product price after the ingredient price to be used is changed, the select the
Recalculate Price button.
The material price is read from the material plant segment by using the default plant. You can change
this plant.
You can indicate which currency to use for the price calculations.
The substance price can be used based on usage (rating and validity area) to allow for price data per
country, and so on.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-19
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Costing (Screen 2)
Substance Price &
Currency/UOM
Substance Price &
Currency/UOM
Manually Entered
Price & Currency
Manually Entered
Price & Currency
Calculated
Price &
Currency
Calculated
Price &
Currency
Material Price &
Currency/UOM
Material Price &
Currency/UOM
Price Unit for
Manual Price &
UOM
Price Unit for
Manual Price &
UOM



The material, substance, and manually entered prices are shown. These are calculated using the currency
and unit of measure (UOM) shown.
The price unit/UOM can be entered for any manually entered prices.
The system calculates the product cost per the currency desired.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-20
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Costing (Screen 3)
Specification
Changed
date/user
Specification
Changed
date/user
Material Price per
Price Unit &
Currency
Material Price per
Price Unit &
Currency
Item is an
output of a
formula
Item is an
output of a
formula
Substance Price
per Price Unit &
Currency
Substance Price
per Price Unit &
Currency
Price Unit for
Material & Material
UOM
Price Unit for
Material & Material
UOM
Price Unit for
Substance &
Substance UOM
Price Unit for
Substance &
Substance UOM
Explosion Stop
flag
Explosion Stop
flag



Additional information can be viewed per ingredient substance. These values are:
Specification Changed date/user: Shows the date and user when the last change to the specification
price was performed
Item is an output of a formula: Indicates, via Yes or No, whether or not this ingredient is the output
of another formula
Material Price per Price Unit: Price of a material that is specified in the material master
- The system takes the price that is displayed from the material master. Since there may be several
prices defined for a material, you specify which price is the basis for calculation. To do this,
choose a price from the drop-down box at the top of the Costs view (for example, standard price
or moving average price). You can specify a default value in Customizing that is automatically
selected when you call the Costs view.
- You can change the prices used for a material or substance. Select the appropriate line and select
your chosen price using one of the following buttons in the toolbar:
Use Material Price
Use Substance Price
Use Manually Set Price
Afterwards, choose the Perform New Costing button to update the calculation.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-21
- Dependencies:
The field that contains the price used for the material or substance is colored.
The information relevant to the price is displayed in the Currency, Price Unit, and Unit of
Measure fields.
Price Unit for Material: Number of units of measure on which the material price is based
- Example: 10 liters of petrol cost 12.00 #. The price unit is 10 in this case.
Substance Price per Price Unit: Price of a substance that is specified as a property of the
specification
- The substance price is selected for costing if it has a higher priority than the material price or
there is no other price that has a higher priority. You can tell if the substance price is used for
costing because the field is colored.
- You can change the prices that are used for a material or substance. Select the relevant line and
choose one of the following buttons in the toolbar to select the required price:
Use Material Price
Use Substance Price
Use Manually Set Price
- Then choose Perform New Costing to update the calculation.
- Dependencies:
You have specified the priorities of the prices used in costing (material, substance, or manually
set price) in Customizing.
If you use the value assignment type in the standard system, specify the substance price in the
property tree in specification management.
The system displays the information on which the price is based in the Currency, Price Unit, and
Unit of Measure fields.
Price Unit for Substance: Number of units of measure on which the substance price is based
- Example: 10 liters of petrol costs 12.00 #. The price unit here is 10.
Stop Explosion due to lack of Authorization flag: This indicator is set for a component in
explosion if the component is not exploded due to lack of authorization.
- The authorization check for a component checks all formulas that could be considered in the
explosion of the component. The formula check comprises the following sub-checks:
If it is a dependent formula, the system checks whether the user is authorized to display the
recipe that belongs to it
The system checks whether the user is authorized to display all formula views assigned to
the explosion scope.
- The formula passes the check if all sub-checks are also successful.
- If none of the possible formulas for the explosion of the component pass the authorization check,
the component is not exploded.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-22
SAP AG 2006
Recipe: Standardization (Screen 1)
Standardization
button
Standardization
button



Standardization allows users to optimize the formula for a specific set of one or more nutrients and
ingredients.
From the Input and Output tab, select the Standardization button.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-23
SAP AG 2006
Recipe: Standardization (Screen 2)
Select Nutrients
and/or
Ingredients
Select Nutrients
and/or
Ingredients
Transfer
Transfer
Select/
Unselect Items
Select/
Unselect Items



Select nutrients and/or ingredients to be standardized or to view the effect of standardization.
Transfer selected items to selection list.
All transferred items are selected by default. Unselect those that will be only be viewed and not
standardized.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-24
SAP AG 2006
Recipe: Standardization (Screen 3)
2. Select Fixed/Variable Substances
2. Select Fixed/Variable Substances
1. Set Data Source
1. Set Data Source
3. Target Amount
3. Target Amount
4. Standardize
4. Standardize



Make sure to set the data source to the correct usage (for example, Public or REG_WORLD).
Select variable items.
Enter values on which to standardize.
Start standardization.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-25
SAP AG 2006
Recipe: Standardization (Screen 4)
New Quantity
New Quantity
Adjusted Quantity
Adjusted Quantity



The new quantity of variable item (Salt) is calculated based on target amount.
The quantity of calcium adjustment is shown.
Choose Generate (adjust ingredient on the Input and Output tab) or Exit (no adjustment is made).

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-26
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Aggregation Tab
Substances/
Materials
Stage 10
Stage 20
Stage 30



The Aggregation tab shows all stages in recipe.
Stages can be viewed by I/O substances or I/O materials.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-27
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Ingredients Tab



The Ingredients tab shows all ingredients from all stages up to the current stage.
It shows all ingredients from recipes that feed into this recipe via input substances.
Ingredients are shown in their order of predominance: highest percentage to lowest percentage,
including any evaporation/absorption.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-28
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Modeling (Screen 1)
Model Formula
Explosion
Model Formula
Explosion



Start the model formula explosion from the Input and Output tab or from anywhere within the recipe by
using the Model Formula Explosion button.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-29
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Modeling (Screen 2)
Set Modeling
Parameters
Set Modeling
Parameters



Set modeling parameters.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-30
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Modeling (Screen 3)
1. Enter Modeling
Parameters
2. Start Modeling



Enter modeling parameters.
Select type of modeling:
Aggregation
Composition
Diet Composition
Input Component List
Nutrient Composition
Ingredients
Start explosion modeling.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-31
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Modeling (Screen 4)



Enter a description of the modeling run.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-32
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Modeling (Screen 5)



Expand inputs based on other recipes that are included as inputs in this recipe.
Change output layout.
Output report.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-33
SAP AG 2006
Formula Explosion: Modeling (Screen 6)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-34
SAP AG 2006
Building Blocks: Types



Building blocks can be:
Actions
Operations
Processes
- Recipes (with stages and/or operations and/or actions)
- Stages (with operations and/or actions)
- Operations (with actions)
- Actions
Stages
Used as a template when inserting into recipes
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-35
SAP AG 2006
Building Blocks: Stage Example



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-36
SAP AG 2006
You should now be able to:
RM Formula: Advanced Topics: Unit Summary
Explain what building blocks are and how they are
used
Explain the difference between the three types of
formulas
Use a stream to link process steps
View the total solids and volume calculations
Explain the use of the reaction flag
Use the consistency and synchronization processes
Set the output quantity by using evaporation
Perform standardization
View costing information
Explain formula explosion and modeling



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-37
Exercises


Unit: RM Formula: Advanced Topics
Topic: Advanced Formula Functions

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Create building blocks
Create and edit dependent recipe and stage formulas
Define streams in stage formulas
Explain synchronization
Set the evaporation and reaction indicators
Perform consistency or set the consistency indicator
Calculate total solids
Calculate volume
Perform costing calculation

You have a recipe that has two stages for making an apple
cinnamon cookie. You want to build a generic Form and Bake
stage and use this to enhance your cookie recipe. You also want
to add vitamin A to your recipe. Finally, you want to ensure that
all stage formulas are consistent, synchronize the recipe-
dependant formula, and set the Consistency Check flag.

1-1 Use dependent formulas in process building blocks.
1-1-1 Create a stage building block with your group number.
1-1-2 Enter Form and Bake as the description.
1-1-3 Enter Cooked Cookie Dough as the stream name.

2-1 Create and edit stage-dependent formulas.
2-1-1 Edit a recipe and enhance the process with a new stage by choosing the recipe that
you created in the process maintenance exercise.
2-1-2 Drag the stage to the recipe by using the Process tab.
2-1-3 Link the output stream from stage 10 to stage 20 using a quantity of 100 and the
unit of measure %.
Link the output stream of stage 20 to stage 30 using a quantity of 750 and the unit
of measure LB.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-38
3-1 Edit stage-dependent formulas by dragging and dropping substances to the formula.
3-1-1 Add Vitamin A to the final stage of your recipe with the quantity of 5 and the unit
of measure LB.
Note: The quantity of the output product is increased to 1,005 LB.
3-1-2 Define evaporation by setting the Evaporation indicator and changing the output
quantity to 1,000 LB.
3-1-3 Review the effect on the ingredients.

4-1 Perform the consistency check for each stage.

5-1 (Optional): Review the Application Log icon from any of the formula views.

6-1 Synchronization
6-1-1 Set the Synchronization flag for the recipe.
6-1-2 Set the Consistency flag for the recipe.

7-1 (Optional): Total solids
7-1-1 Calculate total solids.
7-1-2 Maintain % total solids.
7-1-3 Check changes to total solids.
7-1-4 Change quantities from total solids calculation.

8-1 (Optional): Volume calculation
8-1-1 Choose Volume Calculation from the layout drop-down box.
8-1-2 Maintain the missing densities.

9-1 (Optional): Cost calculation
9-1-1 Prerequisites for performing costing:
You have specified the material prices by choosing Logistics Materials
Management Material Master Material Create (General) in the
Accounting 1 material view.
You have maintained the estimated price for the substances in the property tree.
9-1-2 Perform costing within the formula. Use different currencies, material prices, and so
on.
9-1-3 Perform overwriting prices within the formula by using the substance price and
manual prices.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-39
Solutions


Unit: RM Formula: Advanced Topics
Topic: Advanced Formula Functions

1-1 Use dependent formulas in process building blocks.
1-1 Create a stage building block with your group number.
Place the cursor on the Stage line of the navigation tree.
Right-click and choose Create from the menu.


Enter the following data in the dialog box:
Source: no source (leave blank)
Process type: Stage with Dependent formula
Process key: ###_RM_01

Choose Continue and the stage building block will be created.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-40


1-1-2 Enter the stage description Form and Bake and press ENTER to show all
available tabs.


Add input and output streams to the stage building block.

Choose the Formula tab.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-41

Choose the Input and Output tab.

Click on the first row.


Choose Create/Use Stream .


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-42
1-1-3 Enter Cooked Cookie Dough as the stream name and choose Continue (Enter) .


Enter a unit of measure of LB.
Save your stage.
You have now created a stage building block with an output stream.

2-1 Create and edit stage-dependent formulas.
Editing a recipe and enhancing the process with a new stage:
Do this by copying a stage building block to a recipe.
2-1-1 Double-click on the recipe that you created in the process maintenance exercise.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-43
2-1-2 Drag the stage to the recipe.
If the stage building block that was created in the previous step (1-1) is not
visible, follow the following steps:
Open the Process Element object in the Recipe Management Workbench by
clicking the arrow next to it.
Open the Stage object by clicking the arrow next to it.


Select the Process tab.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-44
Drag the stage ###_RM_01 (your stage building block) onto the
30 Spray Coat row.


2-1-3 Link the output stream from stage 10 to stage 20.
Select the Form and Bake row and choose Navigate to Process Object .

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-45
Select the third row and choose Create/Use Stream .


Select the Dough for Apple Cinnamon Cookie stream and choose Select Stream
(Enter) .

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-46
Enter a quantity of 100 and the unit of measure of %.


Click on the arrow next to stage 30 in your recipe.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-47
Double-click on the Dependant Recipe-Stage formula.


Select the first blank row (after all input materials/substances) and choose
Create/Use Stream .


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-48
Select the Cooked Cookie Dough stream and choose Select Stream (Enter) .


Enter a quantity of 750 and the unit of measure of LB.

You now have added a stage to your recipe and linked it to the preceding and
succeeding stages via streams.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-49
3-1 Edit stage-dependent formulas by dragging and dropping substances to the formula.

First, search for the substances.
Choose Substance in the Recipe Workbench by double-clicking it.
Enter the search criteria:
Note: If you have previous entries for search criteria, choose the Search Criteria
button to remove all of these entries before entering new search
criteria.
Specification Type: REAL_SUB
Name - Identifier: Vitamin A

Choose Hit List .


Double-click on the specification.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-50
The substance is displayed and placed into your Favorites under the Substance object.


3-1-1 Add Vitamin A to the final stage of your recipe.
Activate stage 30 of your recipe by:
Click on the arrow next to the recipe.


Click on the arrow next to stage 30.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-51
Double-click Dependant Recipe-Stage Formula.


Choose the Input and Outputs tab.


Choose the Append Row icon.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-52
Drag the Vitamin A substance from your Favorites into the row that was created in
the previous step.


Enter a quantity of 5 and a unit of measure of LB.

Note: The quantity of the output product is increased to 1,005 LB.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-53
3-1-2 Define evaporation:
Set the Evaporation indicator.
Choose the Quantities tab page.
Set the Evaporation Control indicator by choosing the activation button next to it.

The system will show that the evaporation indicator is set.
Note: If any quantity is shown in the Other Losses cell, remove this quantity before
proceeding to the next step.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-54
3-1-3 Change total output quantity to reflect evaporation
Choose the Input and Output tab page.
Change the output quantity of the Cinnamon Cookies from 1,005 to 1,000. This will
show the effect of evaporation.


Note: The amount of evaporation can be clearly seen on the Ingredients tab.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-55
4-1 Perform the consistency check.

First choose the Dependant Recipe-Stage Formula for stage 10 and then the Quantities
tab page.
Set the Consistency control indicator by choosing the activation button next to it.

The system will perform the consistency check and will automatically set the Consistency
indicator if the consistency check is positive.
If not, the system will create a log file. If any errors appear, the consistency flag can be set
manually by choosing Consistency Check .
Repeat this step for all stages. If any errors occur, manually set the Consistency Check flag.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-56
5-1 (Optional): Check the application log.

Choose Application Log from any of the formula views. Double-click the log you want to
display in the top screen area.
The screen area below it displays the messages belonging to the chosen log.
To display a message long text, choose Message Long Text in the message line.

6-1 Synchronization
6-1-1 Set the Synchronization flag for the recipe.

First choose Dependant Formula underneath the recipe and then the Quantities
tab page.

Set the Synchronization control indicator by choosing the activation button next to
it. The system will display the Synchronization flag in all formula views. This
process will also set the consistency flag for the Recipe-Dependant Formula.


The synchronized formula contains the inputs of all formulas at stage level
that are not the output of a previous formula, as well as the outputs of the last
stage. This means that in synchronization, all the inputs and outputs of all
stage formulas are set off against each other. Streams cancel each other out in
this procedure by definition.

6-1-2 Set the Consistency flag for the recipe.

Go to the recipe by double-clicking on the Your recipe line and then the Basic
Data tab page.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-57

If all stages are consistent and other recipe checks pass, the system sets the Recipe
Consistency Check flag.

7-1 (Optional): Total solids
7-1-1 Calculate total solids.
First choose, from the detail navigation, tree the Dependent Formula for operation
10.
Choose the Input and Output tab page.
Choose Total Solids from the layout dropdown box.
The system is automatically calculating the total solids from the % total solids from
the substance and the quantity.


7-1-2 Maintain % total solids.
Double-click the substance key for Sugar Coating.

The system will access the substance and open the property tree in the detail
navigation area.

Navigate to the Total Solids % property within the physical-chemical branch.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-58

7-1-3 Check changes to total solids.

Change Total Solids % of Sugar Coating to 81 %.

Going back to the dependent stage formula from 7-1-1, you will see the changes to
the total solid amount. You can use the Back icon to go back to the formula.
Note: DO NOT SAVE! Please cancel the processing so that you do not change the
standard specification.


7-1-4 Change quantities from total solids calculation.
You can change the total solid quantity manually. The system will automatically
recalculate the input quantity and save the new quantity.

8-1 (Optional): Volume calculation

8-1-1 Choose Volume Calculation from the layout drop-down box.
Based on the densities from the substance specification, the system calculates the
volume of the input substance and output substance.

8-1-2 Maintain the missing densities.

Double-click the substance with the missing volume.
Navigate in the property tree to the physical-chemical properties branch and choose
the property Density.
Here you can enter the density value. You can use any unit of measurement within
the dimension for the density.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-59
9-1 (Optional): Cost calculation.

9-1-1 Prerequisites for performing costing:
You have specified the material by choosing Logistics Materials Management
Material Master Material Create (General) in the Accounting 1 material
view.
You have maintained the estimated price for the substances in the property tree.
9-1-2 Perform costing.
Find and open the formula for which you want to determine the costs.
Choose the Costs view.
Choose the currency and base unit of measurement.
For the material price, choose the plant and the price type from the drop-down box.
For the substance price, choose the rating and the validity area.
You see the basic settings in the view and the data for the materials and substances
that were entered in the table below. Here, you can read the costing price that
corresponds to the costs.

The system automatically performs costing when you make entries in the
Input and Output tab. The prices that the system uses for costing depend
on how you have specified the priorities in Customizing for Formulas. If you
have not specified any prices for the materials or substances, the system
cannot determine a costing price.

If you want to use manually set prices, enter the prices you want to use in the
Manual Price column for all components that you want to include in costing.

The entries you make for the manual prices are only stored temporarily.
They are deleted when you leave the Recipe Management Workbench.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 10-60
9-1-3 Overwrite prices.
The prices specified by the priorities in Customizing for Formulas are used
automatically for costing. You can undo the priorities by overwriting the prices.
Select the rows of components for which you want to overwrite the price.
Choose the method you wish to use to overwrite the price:
Use Material Price
Use Substance Price
Use Manually Set Price
Choose Perform New Costing .
The costing price is determined from the new prices.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-1
SAP AG 2006
Nutrients:
Specifications,
Composition, and
Standardization



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-2
SAP AG 2006
Contents:
Nutrients: Specs, Composition, and Standardization
Nutrients and nutrient groups
Nutrient composition of a substance
Nutrient Composition tab
Nutrients Tab



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-3
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Manage nutrients and nutrient groups
Create new nutrients and nutrient groups
Assign nutrients to nutrient groups
Maintain the nutrient composition of a substance
Use nutrient data in a recipe formula
Nutrients: Specs, Composition, and Standardization:
Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Nutrients: Specs,
Comp, and Comp, and
Standardization Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-6
SAP AG 2006
Nutrients Can Be Structured in Nutrient Groups
Mineral nutrients
Sodium
Potassium
Calcium
Iron
Phosphorus
Magnesium
Amino acids
Leucine
Isoleucine
Methionine
Arginine
Cysteine
Histidine
Sugar
Glucose
Fructose
Maltose
Starch
Fatty acids
Linoleic acid
Polyunsaturated fatty acids
Linolenic acid
Caprylic acid
Capric acid
General nutrients
Protein
Fat
Carbohydrates
Fibers
Vitamins
...
...
...
Others
...
...
...



Nutrients are special specification types.
Nutrient groups allow a list of nutrients to be maintained and displayed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-7
SAP AG 2006
Create a nutrient in the specification database
Specification category: SUBSTANCE
Specification type: NUTRIENT (Nutrient)
Assign specification key internally or externally
Maintain identifier(s)
Define the unit of measurement for the nutrient
Create a nutrient group in the specification database
Specification category: SUBSTANCE
Specification type: NUTR_GROUP (Nutrient Group)
Assign specification key internally or externally
Maintain identifier(s)
Assign the nutrient to the nutrient group
Definition of Nutrients and Nutrient Groups
The following
screenshots show
each individual step



The steps to create a nutrient and nutrient groups are shown above.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-8
SAP AG 2006
Create Nutrient: Header
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
External assignment of
Specification key
External assignment of
Specification key
Specification type is
NUTRIENT
Specification type is
NUTRIENT



Enter Specification: Nutrient name
Enter Specification Type: NUTRIENT
Enter Authorization group.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-9
SAP AG 2006
Create Nutrient: Identifiers
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.



Enter the identifiers
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-10
SAP AG 2006
Create Nutrient: Unit of Measurement



Add the base unit of measurement for this nutrient.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-11
SAP AG 2006
Create Nutrient: Nutrition Requirements of the
Substance



Enter the Daily requirements and Daily requirements percentage.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-12
SAP AG 2006
Create Nutrient Group: Header
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
External assignment of
Specification key
External assignment of
Specification key
Specification type is
NUTR_GROUP
Specification type is
NUTR_GROUP



Enter Specification: Nutrient Group name
Enter Specification Type: NUTR_GROUP
Enter Authorization group.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-13
SAP AG 2006
Create Nutrient Group: Identifiers
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.



Enter Identifiers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-14
SAP AG 2006
Create Nutrient Group: Assignment of Nutrients
Enter the key of the nutrient
specification or use F4 help
to search for your
nutrient(s).
Enter the key of the nutrient
specification or use F4 help
to search for your
nutrient(s).



Enter the nutrient (for example, SODIUM) or use F4 to search for the nutrient.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-15
SAP AG 2006
Nutrient Composition Maintenance Background
In this section, we will discuss how to maintain the nutrient
composition of a substance.
As a prerequisite, you must have created nutrient groups and
nutrients in the specification database. You have defined a base
unit of measurement for each nutrient, and you have assigned
each nutrient to a nutrient group.
We will review the nutrient composition of a substance.
We will review how this nutrient composition is used as part of
the Nutrient composition and Nutrients tabs within a formula.
We will explain how to store the calculated information within
the output substance of the formula.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-16
SAP AG 2006
Substance Nutrient Composition
Select the Nutrient
Group
Select the Nutrient
Group
Select the Nutrient
Composition
Select the Nutrient
Composition
Per nutrient, enter amount
and Unit of Measurement
Per nutrient, enter amount
and Unit of Measurement



Select nutrient composition property.
Select nutrient group.
For each nutrient (within the nutrient group selected), enter the nutrient value and unit of measure.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each nutrient group.
Add the appropriate usage by navigating to the Usage tab.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-17
SAP AG 2006
Nutrient Composition Tab
Select the nutrient
group
Select the nutrient
group
Select Data Source
Select Data Source
Select
Calculation Base
Select
Calculation Base
View nutrient values
View nutrient values



Select the appropriate nutrient group, data source, and calculation base.
The Nutrient Composition tab shows the amount of each nutrient (from the nutrient group) per
ingredient, and a total for all ingredients.
The system will also display any exception values identified within the ingredient specifications
nutrient compositions.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-18
SAP AG 2006
Total Fat
Mixing 1 hr, Temp 100 C
1 month, room temp
Nutrient Tab
Select the Nutrient Group
Select the Nutrient Group
Select Energy Profile,
Process Loss, and
Storage Loss
Select Energy Profile,
Process Loss, and
Storage Loss
Select Calculation Base
Select Calculation Base
Select Data Source
Select Data Source
Write Nutrient
Composition to
Product (output
substance)
Write Nutrient
Composition to
Product (output
substance)



Select the nutrient group, data source, and calculation base.
If desired, select energy profile, process loss, and/or storage loss.
Nutrient totals are shown for all ingredients for each nutrient.
Totals by nutrient are shown for energy (kcal & kJ) and the losses due to processing or storage.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-19
SAP AG 2006
Configuration of Usages and Data Sources
Configuration of usages
A usage is a combination of a rating, a validity area category, and a
validity area.
Ratings, validity area categories, and validity areas are defined in
their respective IMG activities. Choose Environment, Health &
Safety Product Safety Specification Management Additional
Information for Value Assignment Usage.
Configuration of data sources in Recipe Management
A data source is a combination of a rating and a validity area.
Data sources are defined in the IMG activity Specify Data Sources.
Choose Production Planning for Process Industries Master Data
Recipe Management Formula Specify Data Sources.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-20
SAP AG 2006
Order of Nutrient Groups
The order in which the nutrient groups are displayed (both in the
nutrient composition in the property tree and on the Nutrient
Composition tab page of the formula) initially depends on the order in
which they were created. A new nutrient group is always added at the
end.
However, the order of the nutrient groups can be configured. Do this in
the IMG activity Production Planning for Process Industries Master
Data Recipe Management Formula Specify Sort Sequence for
Nutrient Groups.
The existing nutrient groups are offered in the F4 help, and you can
maintain their sort sequence.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-21
SAP AG 2006
Nutrients: Specs, Composition, and Standardization:
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Manage nutrients and nutrient groups
Create new nutrients and nutrient groups
Assign nutrients to nutrient groups
Maintain the nutrient composition of a substance
Use nutrient data in a recipe formula



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-22
Exercises


Unit: Nutrients: Specs, Composition, and
Standardization
Topic: Creation of Nutrients and Nutrient
Groups, and Necessary Data Maintenance


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Search for existing nutrients and nutrient groups
Create new nutrients and nutrient groups
Assign nutrients to nutrient groups

You need to add Potassium as a new nutrient to the MINERALS
nutrient group to allow the R&D person to see the value of this
additional nutrient from the same view.

1-1 Display existing nutrients and nutrient groups.
1-1-1 Create a list of all nutrient groups.
Which nutrients belong to the nutrient group VITAMINS?
1-1-2 Create a list of all nutrients.
What is the base unit for the nutrient Vitamin A?

2-1 Create a new nutrient and assign it to a nutrient group.
2-1-1 Create a new nutrient with the NAM-PROD identifier Potassium ## and a German
NAM-PROD of Kalium ##. Set the base unit for the nutrient to g (grams).
2-1-2 Assign the nutrient to the nutrient group MINERALS.

3-1 (Optional): Create new nutrients and add a new nutrient group.
3-1-1 Create three new nutrients.
Proceed as described in exercise 2-1
3-1-2 Create a new nutrient group with the name SUGAR_##. Add the NAM-PROD
identifier Sugar ## and a German NAM-PROD of Zucker ##. Add the three
nutrients that you created in exercise 3-1-1 to the nutrient listing composition.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-23
Solutions


Unit: Nutrients: Specs, Composition, and
Standardization
Topic: Creation of Nutrients and Nutrient
Groups, and Necessary Data Maintenance

1-1 Display existing nutrients and nutrient groups.
1-1-1 Create a list of all nutrient groups.
Double-click the Substance object to open the substance search screen.
Note: If you have previous entries for search criteria, choose the Search Criteria
button to remove all of these entries before entering new
search criteria.
Enter Specification Type NUTR_GROUP.
Choose Hit List .


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-24
Which nutrients belong to the nutrient group VITAMINS?
Navigate to the property tree of the nutrient group VITAMINS. You will find the
Nutrient Listing under the Composition node.


There are eight vitamins in the nutrient group.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-25
1-1-2 Create a list of all nutrients.
Double-click the Substance object t to open the substance search screen.
Enter Specification NUTRIENT.
Choose Hit List .

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-26
What is the base unit for the nutrient Vitamin A?
Navigate to the property tree of the nutrient VITAMIN_A. You will find the Base
Unit under the General node.
Grams (g) is the unit of measure.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-27
2-1 Create a new nutrient and assign it to a nutrient group
2-1-1 Create a new nutrient
Click the secondary mouse button on the substance line of the navigation tree and
choose Create from the menu.
Maintain the following data on the Create Specification: Header tab page:
Specification: POTASSIUM_##
Specification type: NUTRIENT
Authorization group: ALL


Press ENTER and the system will show the substance header pages.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-28
Maintain the following data on the Identifiers tab page:
ID Category ID Type Language Identifier
NAM PROD (leave blank) Potassium ##
NAM PROD DE Kalium ##

Select the Identifiers tab and the following window is displayed.


Choose Yes to proceed to the Identifiers tab.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-29
Navigate to the property tree node General Base Unit for Nutrient.
Enter g (grams).
Save your data.


Note: Choose RETURN as needed to return to the Specification Search screen.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-30
2-1-2 Assign the nutrient to an existing nutrient group.

Create a hit list including the nutrient group MINERALS (see exercise 1-1).
Select the nutrient group MINERALS and navigate to the property tree node
Composition Nutrient Listing.
Include POTASSIUM_## in the nutrient listing.

Save your data.

3-1 (Optional): Create new nutrients and add a new nutrient group
3-1-1 Create three new nutrients
Proceed as described in exercise 2-1

3-1-2 Create a new nutrient group
Right-click on the substance line of the navigation tree and choose Create from the
menu.
Maintain the following data on the Specification Header tab page:
Specification: SUGAR_##
Specification type: NUTR_GROUP
Authorization group: ALL
Maintain the following data on the Identifiers tab page:
ID Category ID Type Language Identifier
NAM PROD (leave blank) Sugar ##
NAM PROD DE Zucker ##

Choose Composition Nutrient Listing.
Enter the three nutrients you created in the previous exercise.
Save your data.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-31
Exercises


Unit: Nutrients: Specs, Composition, and
Standardization
Topic: Maintenance of Nutrient Composition of
Real Substances, Nutrient Calculation in
the Formula, and Standardization


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Maintain the nutrient composition of a real substance
Calculate the nutrient content in a formula
Perform standardization

Your business needs to create and update the nutrient
composition of the product of a recipe. To do this, you need to
update the nutrients within an ingredient, review the calculated
nutrients within the recipe, and adjust the formula to meet
specific Vitamin C targets.

1-1 Display and update an existing nutrient composition.
1-1-1 Search for the specification for the flour that is contained in the recipe and view the
nutrient composition.
1-1-2 Select the VITAMINS nutrient group to view the amount of Vitamin C in this
substance.
1-1-3 Update the amount of Vitamin C to .0120 grams.

2-1 Review the nutrient calculations within your recipe.
2-1-1 Perform the nutrient calculations.
2-1-2 Review the nutrient composition of the formula.

3-1 (Optional): Perform standardization to adjust the amount of Vitamin C to 5 milligrams and
adjust the formula with the quantities that are calculated.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-32
Solutions


Unit: Nutrients: Specs, Composition, and
Standardization
Topic: Maintenance of Nutrient Composition of
Real Substances, Nutrient Calculation in
the Formula, and Standardization

1-1 Display and update an existing nutrient composition.
1-1-1 Search for the specification for the flour that is contained in the recipe and view the
nutrient composition.
Double-click on the Substance object.
Enter flour* into the Name-Identifier field.
Choose Hit List .
Note: If you have previous selection criteria in the substance search screen, choose
Search Criteria to remove them.


You will find the nutrient composition in the property tree in Nutrient Composition
under the Composition node.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-33
1-1-2 Select the VITAMINS nutrient group to view the amount of Vitamin C in this
substance.


1-1-3 Update the amount of Vitamin C to .0120 grams.
Choose Save .
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-34
2-1 Review the nutrient calculations within your recipe.
2-1-1 Perform the nutrient calculations
Select the Nutrients tab page.
You find the nutrient content of the output substance plus the contribution of each
input substance.


You can use the pull-down menus to switch to another nutrient group and to another
data source (this means data is read from another instance in EH&S).

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-35
2-1-2 Review the nutrient composition of the formula.
You can review the nutrients per ingredient by choosing the Nutrient Composition
tab.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-36
3-1 (Optional): Perform standardization to adjust the amount of Vitamin C to 5 milligrams.
3-1-1 Select the Input and Output tab page of the stage 30 Dependant Recipe-Stage
Formula.
Choose Standardization .
In the Column Selection dialog box, choose the nutrient Vitamin C to be relevant
for standardization by selecting the nutrient and choosing the right arrow
button. The nutrient is moved from the Column List to the Column Selection and is
marked as relevant for standardization.
Note: If you want to see the effect that standardization will have on other nutrients,
select these nutrients, choose the right arrow button, and then deselect them
from being relevant for standardization.
Confirm the dialog box by choosing Continue (Enter) .


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-37
The Standardization screen appears.


The four input substances and the stream of your formula are listed under Fixed.
Move the stream to the Variable Items section by clicking on the green X on the left
side of the row. Also, change the Data Source to Public, REG_WORLD.
Note: By clicking on the same green square, you move variable items back to the
fixed items section.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 11-38
Enter a target value of 110 and perform standardization by choosing in the
upper-left corner of the screen.You will see that it has adjusted the streams quantity
from 75 to 840.


Generate the new input quantities by choosing Generate and then close the
dialog box by choosing the Save Parameters and Leave Popup in the lowe-left
corner of the screen.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-1
SAP AG 2006
Diet Suitability



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-2
SAP AG 2006
Diet suitability setup
Diet suitability groups
Diet suitability items
Diet Suitability Evaluation tab
Diet Suitability tab
Contents:
Diet Suitability



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-3
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Diet Suitability: Unit Objectives
Manage diet suitability items and groups
Create new diet suitability items and groups
Assign diet suitability items to diet suitability groups
Maintain the diet suitability of a substance
Use diet suitability data in a recipe formula



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-6
SAP AG 2006
Lifestyle Diets
Vegetarian
Vegan
Diet Suitability Items Can Be Structured in Diet
Suitability Groups
Allergens
Milk
Peanuts
Sesame
Soy
Religious Diets
Kosher
Halal



Diet suitability items are special specification types.
Diet suitability groups allow a list of diet suitability items to be maintained and displayed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-7
SAP AG 2006
Create a diet item in the specification database
Specification category: SUBSTANCE
Specification type: DIET (Diet Item)
Assign specification key internally or externally
Maintain identifier(s)
Create a diet group in the specification database
Specification category: SUBSTANCE
Specification type: DIET_GROUP (Diet Group)
Assign specification key internally or externally
Maintain identifier(s)
Definition of Diet Items and Diet Groups



The steps to create a nutrient and nutrient groups are shown above.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-8
SAP AG 2006
Create Diet Item: Header
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
External assignment of
Specification key
External assignment of
Specification key
Specification Type is DIET
Specification Type is DIET



Enter Specification: Diet ttem name.
Enter Specification Type: DIET
Enter Authorization group.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-9
SAP AG 2006
Create Diet Item: Identifiers
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.



Enter the Identifiers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-10
SAP AG 2006
Create Diet Group: Header
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
External assignment of
Specification key
External assignment of
Specification key
Specification Type is
DIET_GROUP
Specification Type is
DIET_GROUP



Enter Specification: Diet Group name
Enter Specification Type: DIET_GROUP
Enter Authorization group.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-11
SAP AG 2006
Create Diet Group: Identifiers
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.
Maintain one or more identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Then navigate to the property tree.



Enter Identifiers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-12
SAP AG 2006
Create Diet Group: Assignment of Diet Items
Enter the key of the diet
specification or use F4 help to
search for your diet item(s)
Enter the key of the diet
specification or use F4 help to
search for your diet item(s)



Enter the diet item (for example, MILK) or use F4 to search for the diet item.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-13
SAP AG 2006
Diet Information Maintenance Background
This section explains how to maintain the diet information for a
substance.
As a prerequisite, you must have created diet groups and diet
items in the specification database. You have assigned each diet
item to a diet group.
We will review the diet information for a substance.
We will review how this diet information is used as part of the
Diet suitability evaluation and Diet suitability tabs within a
formula.
We will explain how to store the calculated information within
the output substance of the formula.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-14
SAP AG 2006
Substance Diet Information
Select the Diet Group
Select the Diet Group
Select the Diet Suitability
Select the Diet Suitability
Per diet item, enter
the appropriate value
Per diet item, enter
the appropriate value



Select Diet Auitability property.
Select Diet Group.
For each diet item (within the diet group selected), enter the appropriate value (see list).
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each diet group
Add the appropriate usage by selecting the Usage tab.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-15
SAP AG 2006
Diet Suitability Evaluation Tab
Select the Diet Group
Select the Diet Group
Select Rating
Select Rating
View diet values and product diet evaluation
View diet values and product diet evaluation
Select Validity Area
Select Validity Area



Select the appropriate diet group, rating and validity area.
The Diet suitability evaluation tab shows the diet information for each ingredient. It also performs an
evaluation to determine the diet information for the output substance
Example for the Allergens diet group: If all ingredients do not contain MILK (values in the Diet
Suitability property are NO), then the product does not contain MILK. If any ingredient contains
Soy, then the product contains SOY.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-16
SAP AG 2006
Diet Suitability Tab
Select the Diet Group
Select the Diet Group
Select Rating
Select Rating
View diet values and product diet
evaluation
View diet values and product diet
evaluation
Select Validity Area
Select Validity Area
Write Diet Suitability
Evaluation to Product
(output substance)
Write Diet Suitability
Evaluation to Product
(output substance)



Select nutrient group, data source, and calculation base.
If desired, select energy profile, process loss, and/or storage loss.
Nutrient totals are shown for all ingredients for each nutrient.
Totals by nutrient are shown for energy (kcal & kJ) and the losses due to processing or storage.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-17
SAP AG 2006
Configuration of usages
A usage is a combination of a rating, a validity area category, and a
validity area.
Ratings, validity area categories, and validity areas are defined in
their respective IMG activities. Choose Environment, Health &
Safety Product Safety Specification Management Additional
Information for Value Assignment Usage.
Configuration of data sources in Recipe Management
A data source is a combination of a rating and a validity area.
Data sources are defined in the IMG activity Specify Data Sources.
Choose Production Planning for Process Industries Master Data
Recipe Management Formula Specify Data Sources.
Configuration of Usages and Data Sources



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-18
SAP AG 2006
The order in which the diet groups are displayed (both in the Diet
Suitability property in the property tree as well as on the Diet
Suitability Evaluation tab page of the formula) initially depends on
the order in which they were created. A new diet group is always
added at the end.
However, the order of the diet groups can be configured. You do this
in the IMG activity Production Planning for Process Industries
Master Data Recipe Management Formula Specify Sort
Sequence for Diet Groups.
The existing diet groups are offered in the F4 help, and you can
maintain their sort sequence.
Order of Diet Groups



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-19
SAP AG 2006
Diet Suitability: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Manage diet suitability items and groups
Create new diet suitability items and groups
Assign diet suitability items to diet suitability
groups
Maintain the diet suitability of a substance
Use diet suitability data in a recipe formula



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-20
Exercises


Unit: Diet Suitability
Topic: Review Diet Suitability Evaluation and
Diet Suitability


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
View the diet suitability evaluation and the diet suitability for
a formula

The R&D department needs to determine the diet suitability of a
formula.

1-1 Display the diet suitability evaluation of the formula.
1-1-1 Review the Diet Suitability Evaluation tab of the formula and determine its
suitability for Allergens, Religious Diets, and Lifestyle Diets.
1-1-2 Review the Diet Suitability tab for the formula for Allergens, Religious Diets, and
Lifestyle Diets.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-21
Solutions


Unit: Diet Suitability
Topic: Review Diet Suitability Evaluation and
Diet Suitability

1-1 Display the diet suitability evaluation of the formula.
1-1-1 Review the Diet Suitability Evaluation tab of the formula and determine its
suitability for Allergens, Religious Diets, and Lifestyle Diets.
Choose the Diet Suitability Evaluation tab.
Select the Allergens diet group from the pull-down menu.
Review the information for Allergens. Note that all ingredients show no allergens
for Milk, Peanuts, or Sesame. But the information does indicate that the Oil, Soy
Bean has the allergen Soy.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-22
Select the Religious diet group from the pull-down menu.
Review the information for Kosher and Halal. Note that only the Water, Food
Grade ingredient is okay for these diets. All of the other ingredients are not.


Select the Lifestyles diet group from the pull-down menu.
Review the information for the two Lifestyles diets. Note that all of the ingredients
meet the requirements for both of the diets.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-23
1-1-2 Review the Diet Suitability tab for the formula for Allergens, Religious Diets, and
Lifestyle Diets.
Choose the Diet Suitability tab.
Select the Allergens diet group from the pull-down menu.
Review the information for Allergens. This is the evaluation that was made on the
Diet Suitability Evaluation tab. These values can be written to the Apple Cinnamon
Cookie specification.


Select the Religious diet group from the pull-down menu.
Review the information for Kosher and Halal. This is the evaluation that was made
on the Diet Suitability Evaluation tab. These values can be written to the Apple
Cinnamon Cookie specification.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 12-24
Select the Lifestyles diet group from the pull-down menu.
Review the information for these diets. This is the evaluation that was made on the
Diet Suitability Evaluation tab. These values can be written to the Apple Cinnamon
Cookie specification.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-1
SAP AG 2006
Energy Profile and
Process & Storage
Losses



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-2
SAP AG 2006
Contents:
Energy Profile and Process & Storage Losses
Process and storage loss profiles in the specification
database
Process and storage loss profiles in the formula of a
recipe
Energy profiles in the specification database
Energy contribution of nutrients
Energy profiles in the formula of a recipe



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-3
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Create process and storage loss profiles as
specifications
Maintain process and storage losses
Use this data in the formula of a recipe
Create energy profiles as specifications
Maintain the energy contribution of nutrients
Use this data in the formula of a recipe
Energy Profile and Process & Storage Losses: Unit
Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process & Profiles: Process &
Storage Storage Losses; Losses; Energy Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-6
SAP AG 2006
Process and Storage Losses
The purpose of process and storage losses is, for example,
under certain circumstances a substance may lose some of its
vitamin content because the vitamins are destroyed by bright
light or heat.
In this unit, we will create process and storage losses in the
specification database and calculate process and storage
losses in a recipe formula.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-7
SAP AG 2006
Maintenance of Process and Storage Losses and
Their Use in Formulas
Create process and storage losses in the specification database
Maintain substance header (specification key, specification type,
identifiers, and so on)
Maintain nutrient losses in the property tree
Use process and storage losses in a formula
Perform nutrient calculations, including process losses
Perform nutrient calculations, including storage losses



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-8
SAP AG 2006
Create Process Loss: Header
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
External assignment of
Specification key
External assignment of
Specification key
Specification Type is
PROC_LOSS
Specification Type is
PROC_LOSS



Enter Specification: Proc_LOS1
Enter Specification Type: PROC_LOSS
Enter Authorization group.
Optionally, enter Substance nature.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-9
SAP AG 2006
Create Process Loss: Identifier
Maintain one or more Identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Maintain one or more Identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.



Add Identifiers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-10
SAP AG 2006
Create Process Loss: Nutrients
Select the
Process
Losses
property.
Select the
Process
Losses
property.
Add each nutrient and
the percentage loss.
Add each nutrient and
the percentage loss.



Select the Process Losses property.
Enter each nutrient (for example, Vitamins or Minerals) that will be lost due to processing. Also enter
the percentage that will be lost.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-11
SAP AG 2006
Create Storage Loss: Header
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
External assignment of
Specification key
External assignment of
Specification key
Specification Type is
STORE_LOSS
Specification Type is
STORE_LOSS



Enter Specification: Store_LOS1
Enter Specification Type: STORE_LOSS
Enter Authorization group.
Optionally, enter Substance nature.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-12
SAP AG 2006
Create Storage Loss: Identifier
Maintain one or more Identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Maintain one or more Identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.



Add Identifiers.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-13
SAP AG 2006
Create Storage Loss: Nutrients
Select the
Process
Losses
property.
Select the
Process
Losses
property.
Add each nutrient and
the percentage loss.
Add each nutrient and
the percentage loss.



Select the Storage Losses property.
Enter each nutrient (for example, Vitamins or Minerals) that will be lost due to storage. Also enter the
percentage that will be lost.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-14
SAP AG 2006
Calculation of Process Loss in the Formula
Switch to the
desired process
and storage
loss.
Switch to the
desired process
and storage
loss.
The process losses for Vitamin A was calculated.
The storage losses for Vitamin A, B1, C, and B12 are calculated.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-15
SAP AG 2006
Energy Profiles
To give you an idea of the purpose of energy profiles, lets look
at the following example:
To calculate the total energetic value of an output substance,
recipe developers do not always add the calories of all the
individual input substances together. Instead, they add up the
total protein, fat, and carbohydrates and then calculate the total
energy using standard factors.
You can create an energy profile to maintain the contribution of
the nutrients protein, fat, and carbohydrates to the total energy
value of the output substance.
We will create an energy profile in the specification database
and use it in the nutrient calculation in the formula of a recipe.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-16
SAP AG 2006
Maintenance of Energy Profiles and Their Use in
Formulas
Create energy profiles in the specification database
Maintain substance header (specification key, specification type,
identifiers, and so on)
Maintain nutrient contribution in the property tree
Use energy profile in a formula
Perform nutrient calculations, including energy profile



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-17
SAP AG 2006
Create Energy Profile: Header
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
Specification category is
SUBSTANCE
External assignment of
Specification key
External assignment of
Specification key
Specification Type is
ENERGY_PRF
Specification Type is
ENERGY_PRF



Enter Specification: EP_01
Enter Specification Type: ENERGY_PRF
Enter Authorization group.
Optionally, enter Substance nature.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-18
SAP AG 2006
Create Energy Profile: Identifier
Maintain one or more Identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.
Maintain one or more Identifiers, if
necessary, in multiple languages.



Enter the Identifier.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-19
SAP AG 2006
Create Energy Profile: Define Nutrient Contribution
Standard
composition
Standard
composition
Enter nutrients and the
energy they contribute
Enter nutrients and the
energy they contribute



Enter the nutrients and the energy they contribute.
The first instance is the data for the kilocalories, and the second instance is for kilojoules.
The reference quantity in each case is set in the environmental parameters:
FRML_NUTR_REF_VALUE and FRML_NUTR_REF_UNIT.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-20
SAP AG 2006
Create Energy Profile: Define Nutrient Contribution (2)
Data in instance 1
100g of Vitamin A contribute 10 kcal,
100g of Vitamin C contribute 30 kcal,
and 100g of Calcium contribute 5 kcal.
Ignore the unit % as well as the
information message that says the
average values exceed 100%.
Data in instance 2
100g of Vitamin A contribute .12 kJ,
100g of Vitamin C contribute .41 kJ,
and 100g of Calcium contribute
.015 kJ.
Ignore the unit % as well as the
information message that says the
average values exceed 100%.
Sequence
number
Sequence
number
Sequence
number
Sequence
number



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-21
SAP AG 2006
Using Energy Profiles in the Formula
When you turn on the desired energy profile, the system
calculates the calories from (in this case) fat and carbohydrates.
The first two lines (Energy in kcal and kJ) are always displayed,
irrespective of the current nutrient group.
Switch to the
desired Energy
Profile
Switch to the
desired Energy
Profile



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-22
SAP AG 2006
Example Calculation: Energy from Fat and
Carbohydrates
In our example, we used an energy profile to calculate the
energy contribution from fat and carbohydrates.
We defined the following energy profile:
100 g of Vitamin A contribute 10 kcal or .12 kJ
100 g of Vitamin C contribute 30 kcal or .41 kJ
100 g of Calcium contribute 5 kcal or .015 kJ
We get the following result:
Our output substance contains 2.23 g of Vitamin A, .89 mg of
Vitamin C, and 4.56 mg of Calcium
(2.23 * 10) + (.00089 * 30) + (.00456 * 5) = 22.3621 Meaning
.223621 kcal/100g
(2.23 * .12) + (.00089 * .41) + (.00456 * .015) = 26.82 Meaning
.002682 kJ/100g



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-23
SAP AG 2006
Energy Profile and Process & Storage Losses: Unit
Summary
You should now be able to:
Create process and storage loss profiles as
specifications
Maintain process and storage losses
Use this data in the formula of a recipe
Create energy profiles as specifications
Maintain the energy contribution of nutrients
Use this data in the formula of a recipe



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-24
Exercises


Unit: Energy Profile and Process & Storage
Losses
Topic: Maintenance of Process and Storage
Losses, Calculation in the Formula


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Create loss profiles in the specification database
Maintain losses
Calculate the losses in a formula

Your R&D group needs to review the process and storage losses
of the vitamins and minerals within a formula. They also need to
add the appropriate losses for a new ingredient and view the
impact on the formula.

1-1 Display existing process and storage loss specifications.
1-1-1 Find all process and storage loss specifications.
1-1-2 Review the information for the PL_01 process loss specification.
1-1-3 Review the process loss information within the Process Losses property.
1-1-4 Repeat steps 1-1-1 through 1-1-3, replacing PROC_LOSS with STORE_LOSS
(for the specification type) and replacing Process Losses with Storage Loss (for
the property).

2-1 Create new process and storage loss profiles.
2-1-1 Create a new process loss with the name PL_RM_##, specification type
PROC_LOSS, and authorization group ALL. Enter the identifier NAM-PROD of
Mixing 30 min, Temp < 80 C ##.
Maintain the related nutrient losses.
2-1-2 Create a new storage loss by copying STORE_LOSS01. Use the specification key
SL_RM_##, specification type STORE_LOSS, and authorization group ALL.
Change the identifier to NAM-PROD of Storage 1 week, shelf ##.
Adjust the nutrient losses as you would like.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-25
3-1 Perform the nutrient calculations, including the process and storage losses.
3-1-1 Select your recipe.
3-1-2 Review the process and storage losses that you created in step 2-1.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-26
Solutions


Unit: Energy Profile and Process & Storage
Losses
Topic: Maintenance of Process and Storage
Losses, Calculation in the Formula

1-1 Display existing process and storage loss specifications.
1-1-1 Find all process and storage loss specifications.
Search for all specifications of the type PROC_LOSS.
Choose Substance in the Recipe Management Workbench by double-clicking it.
Enter the search criteria:
Specification Type: PROC_LOSS
Choose Hit List .


You will get a hit list of the specification that you entered.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-27
1-1-2 Review the information for the PL_01 process loss specification.
Double-click on the PL_01 specification and the specification header will be
displayed along with the properties (in the lower left-hand corner).


1-1-3 Review the process loss information within the Process Losses property.
Double-click on the Process Losses property.
Review the loss amounts for each vitamin.


1-1-4 Repeat steps 1-1-1 through 1-1-3, replacing PROC_LOSS with STORE_LOSS
(for the specification type) and replacing Process Losses with Storage Loss (for
the property).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-28
2-1 Create new process and storage loss profiles.
2-1-1 Create a new process loss with the name PL_RM#, specification type
PROC_LOSS, and authorization grou group ALL. Enter the identifier NAM-
PROD Mixing 30 min, Temp < 80C ##.
Right-click on the Substance object.
Choose Create .


Enter the following data on the Specification Header tab page:
Specification: PL_RM_## (with ## being your initials)
Specification Type: PROC_LOSS
Authorization group: ALL


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-29
Press ENTER.
Select the Identifiers tab page.
Confirm the saving of the specification via the dialog box that is displayed.


The Identifiers tab page will be displayed.
Enter the following:
ID category: NAM
ID type: PROD
Identifier: Mixing 30 min, Temp < 80 C ##


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-30
Maintain the related nutrient losses.
Double-click on the Process Losses property.
In the Specification field, enter VITAMIN_A.
In the Value field enter, for example, 5 %.
Maintain other nutrients in the same way.
Save your data.


2-1-2 Create a new storage loss by copying STORE_LOSS01. Use the specification key
SL_RM_##, specification type STORE_LOSS, and authorization group ALL.
Change the identifier to NAM-PROD of Storage 1 week, shelf ##.
Right-click on the Substance object.
Choose Create .


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-31
Enter the following data on the Specification Header tab page:
Specification: SL_RM_## (with ## being your initials)
Specification Type: STORE_LOSS
Authorization group: ALL


Press ENTER.
Choose Copy Template .


Choose Yes.


Enter STORE_LOSS01 and ALL and choose Back (Enter) .
Choose the Identifiers tab page and update the identifier:
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-32
ID category: NAM
ID type: PROD
Identifier: Storage 1 week, shelf ##


Adjust the nutrient losses as you would like.
Double-click on the Storage Losses property and change the losses (value field) as
appropriate.


Save your data.

3-1 Perform the nutrient calculations, including the process and storage losses.
3-1-1 Select your recipe.
Navigate to the formula you created previously.
Use the Recipe Management Workbench, transaction RMWB. Use the existing
search functions to search for your formula. To do this, double-click on Recipe
in the structure on the left side of the screen.

The search screen is displayed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-33



Choose Hit List .
Double-click your formula. The Recipe: Change Basic Data view is displayed.
3-1-2 Select the Nutrients tab and review the process and storage losses that you created
in step 2-1.
Choose the Nutrients tab page on the stage 30 formula.
The total content of nutrients of one nutrient group is displayed.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-34
Use the pull-down menu and choose your process loss profile.

Review the effect that your process loss profile has on the displayed information.

Use the pull-down menu and choose your storage loss profile.


Review the effect that your storage loss profile has on the displayed information.
Storage loss
quantity
Process loss
quantity
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-35
Exercises


Unit: Energy Profile and Process & Storage
Losses
Topic: Maintenance of Energy Profiles,
Calculation in the Formula


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Create energy profiles in the specification database
Maintain energy profiles
Perform the calculations using energy profiles in a
ormula

Your R&D group needs to review the energy profiles of the
formula. They also need to add the appropriate energy profiles
for a new ingredient and view the impact on the formula.

1-1 Display an existing energy profile.
1-1-1 Search for the specification Energy from Protein, Fat, CH. Look at the
contributions of the nutrients to the total energetic value.

2-1 Perform the nutrient calculations, including the energy profile.
2-1-1 Navigate to the recipe you created previously.
2-1-2 Perform the nutrient calculations, including the energy profile.

I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-36
Solutions


Unit: Energy Profile and Process & Storage
Losses
Topic: Maintenance of Energy Profiles,
Calculation in the Formula

1-1 Display an existing energy profile.
1-1-1 Search for the specification Energy from Protein, Fat, CH. Look at the
contributions of the nutrients to the total energetic value.
Using transaction RMWB, double-click the Substance object to open the
Substance search screen.
Enter Specification Type: ENERGY_PRF
Choose Hit List .


A hit list appears with the energy profile EP_01, Energy from Protein, Fat, CH.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-37
Double-click on the property Standard Composition. The defined contributions are:
First instance, kilocalories per 100 g
o From total carbohydrates 400
o From total fat 900


Second instance, kilojoules per 100 g
o From total carbohydrates 1700
o From total fat 3800


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-38
2-1 Perform the nutrient calculations, including the energy profile.
2-1-1 Navigate to the recipe you created previously.
Navigate to the formula you created previously.
Use the Recipe Management Workbench, transaction RMWB. Use the existing
search functions to search for your formula. To do this, double-click on Recipe
in the structure on the left side of the screen. The Search screen is displayed.


Choose Hit List .
Double-click your formula. The Recipe: Change Basic Data view is displayed.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 13-39
2-1-2 Perform the nutrient calculations, including the energy profile.
Select the Nutrients tab page.
The total content of nutrients of one nutrient group is displayed.
Use the pull-down menu to choose the energy profile Energy from Protein, Fat,
CH.


I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-1
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-2
SAP AG 2006
Key figure functionality
Use for claims statements
Contents:
Key Figures



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-3
SAP AG 2006
Explain the functionality provided by the Key Figures tab
within the formula
List the steps to set up key figure functions
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Key Figures: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-6
SAP AG 2006
Introduction to Key Figures
Key figures are properties of the primary output of a recipe and
are displayed on a tab on the formula level.
The value of each key figure is the result of calculations of data
in the current formula.
Key figures can be grouped together in key figure groups. The
key figures of the selected group are displayed on the Key
Figure tab.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-7
SAP AG 2006
How to Use Key Figures
Activate the key figures formula view (set up and activate
formula views)
SAP delivers two sample function modules
Create a function module that contains the required calculation
The function module interface has to have the same interface
(import and export parameters) as the sample function modules
FRML175_KF_CA_P_RATIO and
FRML175_KF_DENSITY_ARBUCKLE



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-8
SAP AG 2006
Maintain key figures and assign them to key figure groups (define key
figures and key figure groups)
Value assignment type
Used to store/read key figure from output substance
You can only assign a value assignment type to a key figure, not a
characteristic. The value assignment type that is used here must have
two characteristics that follow a (hard-coded) naming convention:
Characteristic for value (type char(30)): <value assignment name> + _VAL for
the value
Characteristics for UOM (type MEINS(3)): <value assignment name> + _UOM
for the UOM
To do:
Create characteristics and create class
Create value assignment type
Set up table-based value assignment
Assign value assignment type to property tree
Make sure that the property tree is valid for the specification type of your
output substance
Function module
Reference the function module used to calculate the key figure
How to Use Key Figures (2)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-9
SAP AG 2006
Rating / Validity area
Maintain rating/validity to be used when accessing or storing
data from value assignment
Text name
The name of the HTML text document that can be maintained via
transaction SMW0
Note: For further documentation and details, see Configuration
documentation: Texts in Web Repository.
Naming convention
The text maintained in SMW0 has the language key concatenated
with the text name, for example, EN_0001_KF.
The text name that is assigned to the key figure is the text name
without the language key, in our example 0001_KF.
How to Use Key Figures (3)



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-10
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example
This is a custom-defined function, created as a copy of FRML175_KF_DENSITY_ARBUCKLE.
We are using some simple logic that reads the composition of the current formula. You want to
look for a particular ingredient (sugar has SUBRECN 0011708).
If the proportion of sugar is < 10% set the key figure to Low Sugar and assign the color green to
the output field; if it is > 50% set the key figure to High Sugar and the color to red. If the
proportion is between 10% and 50%, assign the value Medium Sugar to the key figure and set
the color to yellow. If the product does not
contain the ingredient, set the key figure to No
Data found.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-11
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example (2)
Set up a class Z_KF_TEST and two
characteristics: one to hold the value (_VAL) and
one for the unit of measure (_UOM).
The characteristic names follow the naming
convention described above.
Create a value assignment type and set up the
table-based value assignment. Assign the value
assignment type to a property tree that is valid for
the specification type of your output substance.
If needed, an information text can be maintained
in multiple languages for the key figure via
transaction SMW0.
- Select HTML templates.
- Choose the List button and then the Execute
button on the following screen.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-12
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example (3)
Before you try to create a new text,
make sure that you have assigned the
MIME type you want to use to an editor
(choose Settings Assign MIME
editor). We assigned Microsoft Word as
our editor.
You can now create a new entry
remember the naming conventions for
the object name and maintain one entry
for every language.
When you choose the Change button, the
editor you assigned will open and you
can maintain your text.
Save the file in HTML format.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-13
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example (4)
Now you are ready for the actual
configuration (Define Key Figures) in
the IMG.
Below, you can see the key figure we set up with a short text, the value assignment type
we just created, and the rating/validity area that is to be used when reading/writing
from/to the value assignment type.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-14
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example (5)
Assign the text (remember to leave
out the language key) to the key
figure. By selecting Key Figure
Texts, you can create language-
dependent texts for the key figure.
Define a new key figure group or
use an existing key figure group
and assign the new key figure.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-15
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example (6)
Select the corresponding key
figure group and you should see the
key figure with a calculated result
(assuming that the formula contains
the data to determine the key figure).
In this example, the key figure value had already been determined once before and was
written to the output substance.
If you choose the question mark button next to the
key figure short text, you see the text that has been
maintained for the key figure (dependent on your
logon language).
Currently, the Ingredients tab shows that
our sugar content is about 2.35%.
To see the impact on the key figure,
change the quantity of sugar that is being
used.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-16
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example (7)
The Ingredients tab now shows that the sugar content is about 72.94%.
Lets take a look at the key figure.
The calculated key figure has
changed, as well as the
background color for the
Calculated Value field.
The calculated value is now
different from the value stored
in the specification.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-17
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures: Example (8)
By choosing Transfer , the calculated value
is written to the output specification.
The calculated value and the value
from the specification are now identical
again.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-18
SAP AG 2006
The delivered function modules:
Require value assignment types
Have hard-coded requirements for certain master data (see
LFRML175TOP):
Nutrient group that contains all nutrients: ALL_NUTR
Function module FRML175_KF_CA_P_RATIO requires:
Nutrient SUBID for phosphor: P
Nutrient SUBID for calcium: CA
Function module FRML175_KF_DENSITY_ARBUCKLE requires:
Nutrient SUBID for water: WATE
Nutrient SUBID for fat: FAT
The formulation used to determine these key figures is described in
their corresponding text
Delivered Function Modules and Findings



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-19
SAP AG 2006
Claims Example
Claim Check
Claim Check
Information
Information
Claim
statement
Claim
statement
Amount used for claim
check
Amount used for claim
check
Example of using key figures to identify possible claims



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 14-20
SAP AG 2006
Key Figures
You should now be able to:
Explain the functionality provided by the Key Figures
tab within the formula
List the steps to set up key figure functions




I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe
Engineering
Change
Management



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-2
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Differentiate between Engineering Change Management
and versioning
Create change statuses of a recipe
Recipe Engineering Change Management:
Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-3
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering Recipe Engineering
Change Management Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-5
SAP AG 2006
Engineering Change Management: Background
In Recipe Management, you have two basic options to manage
changes and versioning of recipes:
Engineering Change Management (ECM)
Versioning
For each type of recipe, you must specify whether you want to
use one or the other, since these two options exclude each
other.
In this unit, we will focus on managing changes by means of
creating change statuses of a recipe, that is, by using
Engineering Change Management.



If, in addition to status management, the check of dependent change statuses is active for a recipe type,
all subsequent change statuses must have the status In Process or Rejected.
Checking of dependent change statuses
The recipe status network guarantees the correct sequence of processing stages within a change
status. In addition to this, this function checks the preceding and succeeding change status when a
status is changed. This check applies to all status changes that influence the changeability of recipe
data. The check ensures that the processing sequence is observed across all change statuses of a
recipe.
Prerequisites
The following functions have been activated for your recipe types (see Customizing for Recipes,
IMG activity Recipe Settings):
- Status management
- The check of dependent change statuses at status changes (Depend.Chg Statuses indicator)
Please refer to the Recipe Management Documentation for details.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-6
SAP AG 2006
Create Recipe: Select Recipe Type
When you create a new recipe, you have to select a recipe type. The
type determines:
- General recipe, site recipe, or master recipe level
- Whether versioning or ECM is used
The standard configuration includes one normal general recipe
using ECM and one Gen. Recipe w. Vers. using versioning.
As an example, we will create a recipe of type general recipe.



Double-click the Recipe icon in the Recipe Management Workbench. The initial screen of the recipe
information system is displayed.
Choose Create.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-7
SAP AG 2006
Create Recipe: Relevant Tab Pages
The new recipe consists of various
tab pages, including the Eng.
Change Statuses tab page.
The new recipe consists of various
tab pages, including the Eng.
Change Statuses tab page.



Recipe Type
A recipe type is a classification of recipes according to their level of detail and their application
(according to ISA Standard S88). The following recipe types are available in the SAP standard system.
They can be used as templates for your own recipe types:
General recipe (according to S88)
Site recipe (according to S88)
Master recipe (according to S88)
Use
Depending on the application and enterprise area, the type of information required ranges from a
general description of the requirements to concrete procedural instructions for a specific production
plant. When creating a recipe, you therefore assign every recipe to a recipe type defined in
Customizing. In this way, you determine the recipe structure and attributes. You specify, for
example:
- Which objects may be linked to a recipe, for example, higher- or lower-level recipes, a formula or
production version, an independent or recipe-dependent formula
- Whether status management is active in a recipe and which status profile is used
- Whether you can or must use change master records in recipe editing
- Which tab pages (views) are active in a recipe
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-8
SAP AG 2006
Create Change Status: Initial Change Status
After creating the recipe, it has one change
status, valid from (in our example) today until
December 31, 9999.
If you want a new version of the recipe, you have
to create a new change status
(Version = Change Status!)
To do this, choose the Create Change Status
button. In the dialog box that follows, enter a key
date. The key date must be later than the valid-
from date of the initial change status.
After creating the recipe, it has one change
status, valid from (in our example) today until
December 31, 9999.
If you want a new version of the recipe, you have
to create a new change status
(Version = Change Status!)
To do this, choose the Create Change Status
button. In the dialog box that follows, enter a key
date. The key date must be later than the valid-
from date of the initial change status.



The first change status of the recipe is created with the data you entered. Depending on your system
settings, it is either assigned the number 1 or a key determined by your own criteria (see Customizing
for Recipes, IMG activity Set Up Name Assignment for Change Statuses).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-9
SAP AG 2006
Create Change Status: New Change Status
As a result, our recipe now has two change statuses.
The valid-from-date of the initial change status has
automatically been adjusted to the day before the second
change status becomes valid.
A change number has been created automatically.



You can create the change master record, which is identified by a change number, in the system as
follows:
In Engineering Change Management before recipe editing
From within the recipe when creating the change status, as shown in the example above
You can either create the change master record manually or let the system generate it. If you want to use
generation, the appropriate change number profile must be assigned to the recipe type (see Customizing
for Recipes, Recipe Settings -> Define Properties of a Recipe Type).
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-10
SAP AG 2006
Edit Change Number: Transaction CC02
Using transaction CC02, you can display and edit the change number that was created
automatically together with the new change status:
In the current example, we
have overwritten the change
number description and
included a Reason for
Change.



If you want to create the change master record manually before creating the change status of the recipe,
use transaction CC01:
Enter data in the change header as required.
Choose Object types and activate object types PVS variant, Specification, Characteristics of Class,
Classification, and Recipe Management.
Save the change master record.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-11
SAP AG 2006
Edit Change Number: Results
When we go back into the Recipe Management Workbench
and into our recipe, the changes that were made to the
change number (description and reason for change) are
displayed.
The active change status is displayed in green. To switch to
another change status, select the desired change status
and choose the Change Eng. Change Status button.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 15-12
SAP AG 2006
ECM: Make Changes in the Formula
When working with recipe-dependent
formulas, you can maintain the formulas
for each change status independently of
each other.




I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-1
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and
Replacement



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-2
SAP AG 2006
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Differentiate between Engineering Change
Management, replacement, and versioning
Create new versions of a recipe
Replace one recipe with another recipe
Recipe Versioning, Drafts, and Replacement:
Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-3
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning, Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-5
SAP AG 2006
Versioning: Background
Depending on the type of recipe, change and version
management is performed by using change master records in
Engineering Change Management, or by using versioning
within Recipe Management.
These two options exclude each other; you can use one or the
other.
In this unit, we will focus on change and version management
using versioning of recipes.
We will also take a brief look at the replacement function.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-6
SAP AG 2006
Create Recipe: Select Recipe Type
When you create a new recipe, you have to select a recipe type. The
type determines:
- General recipe, site recipe, or master recipe level
- Whether versioning or ECM is used
The standard configuration includes one normal general recipe
using ECM and one Gen. Recipe w. Vers. using versioning.
As an example, we will create a recipe of type Gen. Recipe w.
Vers.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-7
SAP AG 2006
Create Recipe: Name Amended by Version
The recipe key is amended to include a counter for the recipe versions.
It does not matter whether the key (name/number) of the recipe is assigned manually by
the user or internally by the system.
The length of the recipe key, as well as the separator and number of digits of the
version counter, is specified in Customizing.
Customizing settings under
Production Planning for Process
Industries Master Data Recipe
Management Versioning Settings:
Name/number key of recipe is separated
from the version number by a decimal
point; the version number is three digits.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-8
SAP AG 2006
Create Recipe: Relevant Tab Pages
There is no Eng. Change Management tab page.
This has nothing to do with the configuration of
the recipe tab pages; the reason is that you are
not allowed to use ECM with recipes which, due
to their type, use versioning.
There is no Eng. Change Management tab page.
This has nothing to do with the configuration of
the recipe tab pages; the reason is that you are
not allowed to use ECM with recipes which, due
to their type, use versioning.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-9
SAP AG 2006
Create New Version: Copy Existing Recipe
The easiest way to create a new version of an existing recipe is
to select the recipe, right-click, and choose Copy.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-10
SAP AG 2006
Create New Version: Version Counter
In the following dialog box, the name of the recipe
JUICE_02 is taken from the original recipe, and the version
counter is automatically increased to 002.
Confirm this by choosing the green checkmark.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-11
SAP AG 2006
Create New Version: Valid To/From Dates
The Valid Fromand
Valid To fields are
initially empty; they
must be maintained
manually, keeping the
general restrictions
and additional
restrictions you set in
Customizing in mind.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-12
SAP AG 2006
The order of the recipe versions must always be unique. It then
follows that the valid-from date of a new recipe version must
always be later than the valid-from date of the previous version.
Restrictions: Unique Version Order
Recipe X, Version 1, valid from 01 April 2003 until 31 Dec 9999
Recipe X, Version 2, valid from 01 April 2003 until 31 Dec 9999
April 01, 2003



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-13
SAP AG 2006
Depending on the settings in Customizing, overlap (that is, two
versions of one recipe being valid at the same time) may or may not
be allowed.
If overlap is not allowed for a particular recipe type, you have to
manually adjust the valid-to date of the previous version to an earlier
date than the valid-from date of the new version to avoid overlap.
Restrictions: Overlap
Recipe X, Version 1, valid from 01 April 2003 until 31 Dec 9999
Recipe X, Version 2, valid from 01 June 2003 until 31 Dec 9999
OK
Overlap from 01 June onwards
Customizing settings Production Planning for
Process Industries Master Data Recipe
Management Versioning Settings



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-14
SAP AG 2006
Depending on the Customizing settings, gaps in the total validity of
recipe versions may or may not be allowed.
If gaps are not allowed for a particular recipe type, you have to
manually adjust the valid-to date of the previous version to exactly
one day before the valid-from date of the new version.
Restrictions: Gaps
Recipe X, Version 1, valid from
01 April until 20 May 2003
Recipe X, Version 2, valid from
01 June 2003 until 31 Dec 9999
OK Gap - no valid
version exists
between 21 May and
31 May
Customizing settings Production Planning for Process Industries
Master Data Recipe Management Versioning Settings



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-15
SAP AG 2006
Restrictions: Customizing Settings
Customizing settings Production Planning for Process Industries
Master Data Recipe Management Versioning Settings.
In standard Customizing, all recipe types allow gaps and overlap.
You cannot change these settings once you have created recipes
of this type; however, you can create new recipe types that do not
allow gaps and/or overlap.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-16
SAP AG 2006
Replacement: Background
The replacement function is related to version and change
management, but serves a different purpose.
With the replacement function, you specify that a recipe
replaces another one, without this recipe actually being a new
version.
For example: A company produces ice cream. They have
changed the flavor of their chocolate ice cream several times,
so these different recipes would be maintained as several
versions of the recipe Chocolate ice cream. However, if the
company decides to give up on chocolate ice cream and go
for vanilla instead, they would probably not create the vanilla
ice cream recipe as a new version of chocolate. Instead, the
vanilla recipe series would start with version 1, and replace
the last chocolate recipe.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-17
SAP AG 2006
Replacement: Restrictions
The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when using
the replacement function:
The recipe to be replaced must be have the status Released or
Obsolete.
You can only replace the last recipe of a version chain. In our
example, JUICE_03.001 will replace JUICE_02.002. We cannot
replace JUICE_02.001
The valid-from date of the replacing recipe must be later than the
valid-from date of the replaced recipe.
Note:
A new recipe may replace more than one existing recipe.
A recipe using Engineering Change Management may replace a
recipe using versioning, and vice versa.




For details concerning the status network for recipes, please refer to the documentation.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-18
SAP AG 2006
Replacement: Data Maintenance in the Replacing
Recipe
We created the new recipe JUICE_03.001.
To specify the replacement, navigate to
the Replacement tab page of the recipe
and choose Create.
Then enter the recipe to be replaced.
We created the new recipe JUICE_03.001.
To specify the replacement, navigate to
the Replacement tab page of the recipe
and choose Create.
Then enter the recipe to be replaced.



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 16-19
SAP AG 2006
Replacement: Update of Replaced Recipe
Now when we navigate to the
recipe JUICE_02.002, we find that
the entry Recipe replaced by has
automatically been adjusted.
Now when we navigate to the
recipe JUICE_02.002, we find that
the entry Recipe replaced by has
automatically been adjusted.




I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-1
SAP AG 2006
Supply Chain
Management
Integration and
Recipe
Transformation



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-2
SAP AG 2006
ISA S88 recipe hierarchy
Corresponding elements of RM recipe and PP-PI master recipe
Principles of Supply Chain Management integration
Transformation features
Transforming recipes
Merging and splitting operations
Contents
Supply Chain Management Integration and Recipe
Transformation



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-3
SAP AG 2006
Explain how PLM Recipe Management integrates with
Supply Chain Management
Explain how transformation from a general recipe to a
master recipe is accomplished
List the prerequisites and corresponding elements in the
transformation
Explain the possibilities for influencing master recipe
generation
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Supply Chain Management Integration and Recipe
Transformation: Unit Objectives



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-4
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Phrase Management
3 3
Specification Database:
Advanced
4 4
Recipe Process and
Process Elements
8 8
2 2
Recipe Header
Information
7 7
Specification Database:
Basics
Recipe Management
Workbench
6 6
Course Introduction
1 1
WWI Reporting and
EH&S Tools
5 5
RM Formula Basics
9 9
RM Formula:
Advanced Topics
10 10



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-5
SAP AG 2006
Course Overview Diagram
Recipe Versioning,
Drafts, and Replacement
Recipe Engineering
Change Management
SCM Integration and SCM Integration and
Recipe Transformation Recipe Transformation
Trial Management and
RM Outlook
18 18
15 15
16 16
17 17
Diet Suitability
Nutrients: Specs, Comp,
and Standardization
Profiles: Process and
Storage Losses; Energy
Key Figures
14 14
11 11
12 12
13 13



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-6
SAP AG 2006
Your company is in a process industry including
consumer products (food and non-food), chemicals,
and pharmaceuticals and is interested in improving
your new product development and
commercialization process.
SCM Integration and Recipe Transformation:
Business Scenario



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-7
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Development on Different Levels
Enterprise
Definition
Site Recipe
Site Recipe
Usage Variations
For example: Country-specific for
legal compliance
Master Recipe in PP-PI
Master Recipe in PP-PI
Plant-specific variations
For example: Based on
particular equipment
General Recipe
General Recipe
Transformation



The ISA S88 batch manufacturing standard requires a three-level recipe hierarchy:
General recipe used company-wide as template
Site recipe variations used for regional, country-specific, or legal compliance variations
Master recipe for production fitting to resources in production plant
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-8
SAP AG 2006
Supply Chain
Management
Product Lifecycle
Management
PLM and SCM Integration
Manufacturing
Execution,
Batch
Management
Purchasing,
Planning
Quality Management
Recipe Management
Master Recipe, BOM
Site Recipe
General Recipe
Inspection
plan
Inspection
lots



If you are using classic SAP R/3 Production Planning, bills of material can be generated from the RM
recipe.
For production planning for process manufacturing, the RM recipes can be transformed into a
Production Planning for Process Industries (PP-PI) master recipe. PP-PI supports, for instance,
production of by-products and co-products common in process industries.
In-process inspections (IPC quality management) can also be transferred from the RM recipe to the PP-
PI master recipe.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-9
SAP AG 2006
Advanced Planning and
Optimization
Advanced Planning and
Optimization
Supply Chain Integration: Following Recipe Data
Batch Information Cockpit
Batch Information Cockpit
PI sheet and process control
PI sheet and process control
Electronic batch record (EBR)
Electronic batch record (EBR)



You have the following functions in SCM:
Advanced Planning and Optimization
The full Batch Information Cockpit
Process instruction sheet
Process control interface
Electronic batch record
Electronic signature
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-10
SAP AG 2006
Master Recipe Structure (PP-PI)
Material (Product)
Resource Network
Process Instruction
Characteristics
1
N
Material
Components
Inspection
Characteristics
Relationships
1
N
1
N
Phases
Primary
Resources
1 N
1 N
1 N
1 N
1 1
Resource
Selection Criteria
Recipe Header
Secondary
Resources
Operations
Process
Instructions



A master recipe describes the production of one or more materials in a production run. It defines the
following data that is required to manufacture materials: Process steps, resources, material components,
data for quality inspections in the process, and control information for the process control level.
The recipe header contains data that applies to the entire recipe. A resource network and the material to
be produced can be assigned to the recipe header.
Master recipes comprise several process operations. Each operation is divided into phases. The
operations themselves describe the various steps that are required during the production process. An
operation can be assigned one primary resource and one resource selection criterion. The assigned
primary resource applies to all the phases in the operation. The resource selection criterion is
encapsulated in a class of class type 019 with characteristics with values assigned.
Phases provide a detailed description of the operations in the production process. The chronological
order of the phases is defined by the relationships between them. These relationships link the start and
end of the phases. A phase can consist of several process instructions.
Process instructions are structures that are used to transfer data from process planning to process
control. A process instruction can consist of several process instruction characteristics.
In addition, one or more of the following components can be assigned to the operations and phases:
secondary resources, material components, and inspection characteristics
The material components in the bill of material are assigned to the operations and phases in the
materials list. A specific material component is assigned to exactly one operation or phase. Several
different material components can be assigned to an operation or phase.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-11
SAP AG 2006
Relationship: RM Recipe and PP-PI Master Recipe
1 N
Resource
Network
Resource
Control Recipe
Destination
Master Recipe
(Operation View)
Operation
Phase
Process
Instruction
Traditional R/3 Master Recipe
M N
Formula Bill of material
QM Inspection char.
Equip. req. Prim. & Sec resource.
Classification of equip. req.
Resource selection criteria
Formula Bill of material
1 1
Relationships
Material assignment
QM Inspection char.
Equip. req. Sec. resource
Process
Process Stage
Process Operation
Process Action
General Recipe



The system generates a master recipe from a general/site recipe. In doing so, the system transforms
general recipe stages to master recipe operations, and general recipe operations to master recipe phases.
General recipe actions provide information for process instructions in the master recipe. Resource
assignments are also determined here.
The process corresponds to the operational view of the master recipe.
The process stage corresponds to the operation (also a resource).
The process operation corresponds to the phase (also a control recipe destination).
The process action corresponds to the process instruction.
The first equipment requirement in the general recipe stage provides information for the resource
selection criteria in the master recipe operation. The class object contains the resource selection criteria.
The classification of the equipment requirements that each general recipe stage be copied to the resource
selection criteria for the relevant master recipe operation.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-12
SAP AG 2006
Relationship: RM Recipe and PP-PI Master Recipe (2)
1 N
Resource
Network
Resource
Control Recipe
Destination
Master Recipe
(Operation View)
Operation
Phase
Process
Instruction
Traditional R/3 Master Recipe
M N
Formula Bill of material
QM Inspection char.
Equip. req. Prim. & Sec resource.
Classification of equip. req.
Resource selection criteria
Formula Bill of material
1 1
Relationships
Material assignment
QM Inspection char.
Equip. req. Sec. resource
Process
Process Stage
Process Operation
Process Action
General Recipe



Using the equipment requirements for the general recipe, the system can assign a primary resource to a
master recipe operation, or the secondary resource of a master recipe operation, or a master recipe
phase. One primary resource is allowed for each master recipe operation. The first equipment
requirement in each general recipe stage determines the primary resource. The remaining equipment
requirements in the general recipe stage determine the secondary resource for the master recipe
operation.
The equipment requirements for the general recipe operation determine the secondary resource in the
master recipe phase.
The bill of material is generated from the formula for the general recipe or from the formulas of the
selected general recipe stages. If the formula is assigned to the process stage, the formulas for the
selected stages are aggregated. The bill of material is then generated from this aggregated formula.
The material components in the generated bill of material are assigned to the master recipe operations or
phases. This depends on the formula components that were assigned to the stages or operations in the
general recipe.
If quality management data is assigned to the stream, an additional phase is created in the master recipe
operation. The QM data is copied to the inspection characteristics in the phase.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-13
SAP AG 2006
Transformation Prerequisites
You have made the necessary settings for transforming the
master recipe.
All the master data exists in the target system in which you
want to create the master recipe:
Material master
Classes
Properties
Resources
Resource classification
Master inspection characteristics
Inspection methods
Process instruction category and process instruction
characteristic



Use the transformation function to generate master recipes from general recipes. When you do so, use
the general recipe as a template only.
The system generates a master recipe from a general/site recipe. In doing so, the system transforms
general recipe stages to master recipe operations, and general recipe operations to master recipe phases.
General recipe actions and process parameters provide information for process instructions in the master
recipe. Resource assignments are also determined here.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-14
SAP AG 2006
Recipe Transformation: Initial Screen
Source recipe
key
Controls elements
copied
Manually or
automatically from
number range



Enter the following general recipe data:
Recipe Object Name
Valid From
Key Date
RFC Destination (only if the systems are different)
Enter the following master recipe data:
Task list Group, Group Counter, and Production Version
Plant
Profile
Task list Status
Usage
Control Recipe Destination
Key Date
Change Number
Transformation Group
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-15
SAP AG 2006
Transformation Transaction
Equipment
/ Resource
Equipment
/ Resource
Equipment /
Resource



The left side of the screen displays elements from the general recipe. Only the stages marked in yellow
will be transformed with all their dependent elements.
In the middle you see the elements of the PP-PI master recipe that will be generated.
The right side of the screen displays the detail screen, which opens when you double-click an element of
the master recipe.
Elements marked in green require a manual activity, for instance, selecting a resource from alternatives.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-16
SAP AG 2006
Transformation: Materials List



By choosing the Materials List button, you can see the materials list, which is the basis on which to
generate the bill of materials.
Materials can be assigned in the general recipe to a certain stage. You do this in the Process view of the
Input/Output tab page. In PP-PI, these materials will be the input materials for these operations.
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-17
SAP AG 2006
Supply Chain Management Integration and Recipe
Transformation: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Explain how PLM Recipe Management integrates with
Supply Chain Management
Explain how transformation from a general recipe to a
master recipe is accomplished
List the prerequisites and corresponding elements in the
transformation
Explain the possibilities for influencing master recipe
generation



I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
I

n

t

e

r

n

a

l




U

s

e




S

A

P




P

a

r

t

n

e

r




O

n

l

y
SAP AG PLM160 17-18
Exercises


Unit: SCM Integration and Recipe
Transformation
Topic: Transformation Process


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
Transform RM recipes to PP-PI master recipes
List the prerequisites and corresponding
elements in the transformation
Explain the possibilities for influencing master
recipe generation


1-1 Insert the transaction for transforming recipes (MRTRS_START) in the Favorites
tra